Home

CPM2C OPERATION MANUAL

1. Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Expansion I O Unit with 20 I O Points CPM2C 20EDR Output capacity 2 250 VAC or 24 VDC Outputs IR word n 1 Load 2 Load 3 At 5 Load S l6 COM F 7 0104 8 01005 Toad 9 LOOM LaL 4 tou dad 11 Load A 43 COM Expansion Unit with 8 Output Points CPM2C 8ER Output capacity 2 250 VAC 24 VDC Outputs IR word n 5 Load ae 7 1 Load 5 EC COM 6 2 COM L p a i L ir Lond 0101 5 3 01005 Load i lr J COM 4 Lapa E 22 L EE jr rag 219 3 01006 1 011 03 01107 Ora PT COM 2 5 Yu e abu 1 7 Aka LK 4 L 4 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Units with Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Connector CPU Units with 10 I O Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 10C IDTC D Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 1 2 A common Outputs IR 010 B iS zjaje e e o CPU Units with 10 I O Points Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 10C JDT1C D Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 1 2 A common Outputs IR 010 113 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 114 CPU Units with 2
2. M Inputs IR word m Outputs IR word n 00 20 19 IN OS Sinking CPM2C 24EDTM Sourcing CPM2C 24EDT1M 01 18 17 IN 09 NC 1 2 24V NC 1 2 02 16 15 IN 10 NC 3 4 COM NC 3 4 COM 24 V INO3 14 13 IN 11 NC 5 6 OUT 07 NC 5 6 OUT 07 04 12 11 NC 7 8 OUT 06 7 8 OUT 06 05 10 9 NC NC 9 10 OUT 05 NC 9 10 OUT 05 06 8 7 NC NC 11 12 OUT 04 NC 11 12 OUT 04 07 6 5 NC NC 13 14 OUT 03 NC 13 14 OUT 03 COM 4 3 COM NC 15 16 OUT 02 NC 5 16 NC 2 1 NC NC 17 18 OUT 01 NC 17 18 OUT 01 NC 19 20 OUT 00 NC 19 20 OUT 00 63 Unit Components Section 2 2 Units with 32 I O Points CPM2C 32EDT 64 Inputs IR word m Outputs IR word n IN 00 IN 01 IN 02 IN 03 IN 04 IN 05 IN 06 IN 07 COM NC 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 IN 08 IN 09 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 COM NC Sinking CPM2C 32EDTM 24N COM OUT 15 OUT 14 OUT 13 OUT 12 OUT 11 OUT 10 OUT 09 OUT 08 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 24V COM OUT 07 OUT 06 OUT 05 OUT 04 OUT 03 OUT 02 O
3. Terminal Block XW2C 20G5 IN16 Relay Terminals XW2E 20G5 IN16 Connecting Cable XW2Z Connecting Cable XW2Z A 00015 00 oO 00 0 RRR DEDE mi amp LK ENE EES ECE 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 12 2121 Q 1 a 18 8 9 8 8 8 gt Iv Je e aluiz s lo ro e ala e e 105 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Terminal Blocks XW2C 20G6 lO16 Connecting Cable XW2Z Connecting COM to Terminal Connecting COM to Terminal gt Relay Terminals G7TC ID16 G7TC IA16 Connecting Cable 679 0 G79 O 106 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Input Devices The following table shows how to connect various input
4. 151 4 3 Using a Programming Console 154 4 4 Programming Console Operations 162 4 5 Programming 1 4 4 185 SECTION 5 Test Runs and Error Processing 191 5 1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure 192 5 2 Self diagnostic Functions os ia sesso esI x ex c RERO ER RR RE 193 5 3 Programming Console Operation Errors 196 5 4 Programming Errors 1 196 5 5 Troubleshooting Flowcharts 198 5 6 Maintenance Inspections 206 5 7 Battery Replacement 2 207 SECTION 6 Expansion Memory Unit 209 OVEIVIEW nU EID OI UMWELT EL OIN RECS 210 6 2 Specifications and Nomenclature 1 211 6 3 Handling re pL o p Wc Eget pc Estatus 212 vii viii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 7 Simple Communications Unit 219 dl 2 Introduction ceo bo Ee tb bU err de 220 7 2 Unit Components and Functions 2
5. gt 7 Status Indicators Indicate the operating status of the Simple Communications Unit Status Meaning Lit Communications established between Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit Simple Communications Unit operating Not lit Simple Communications Unit not operating Flashing Communications between Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit either not established or interrupted Lit Fatal error occurred Unit operation stops Flashing Non fatal error occurred Unit operation continues Not lit Unit operating normally Flashing Transferring data between Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit Not lit Not transferring data Flashing Transferring data between Simple Communications Unit and connected components Not lit Not transferring data 73 Unit Components Section 2 2 8 Connector Connects to CPU Unit communications port RS 422 Interface Block Diagram C5V TxD 9 SDB SDA SE RxD 2 2 7 CPM2C CIF01 Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Unit Front View Do not use the 2 01 with any PC other than the CPM2C Do not connect another 2 01 or the CPM2C CIF11 to the 2 01 The 2 111 be connected to the 2 01 but the peripheral port and the RS 232C port of the CPM2C CN111 cannot be used s
6. 140 3 4 14 CompoBus S I O Link Connections 140 79 Design Precautions Section 3 1 3 1 Design Precautions Observe the following precautions when designing a system incorporating a CPM2C PC 3 1 1 Power Supply Wiring Separate the power supply wiring from the control system CPM2C system and DC I O system wiring Separate the control circuits that supply power to the main Unit from the main circuits using dedicated circuit protectors and fuses 3 1 2 Power Supply Voltage Z N Caution Use the power supply voltages indicated in Section 2 Unit Specifications and Components Failure to adhere to the specifications may result in fire If the power supply voltage falls below 85 of the rated voltage the CPM2C will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF If low voltage affects the equipment etc provide a protection circuit which shuts OFF the output until the supply voltage returns to the rated value In places where power supply conditions are poor take steps to ensure that power is supplied at the rated voltage Be sure to adhere to safety precautions such as providing breakers to prevent short circuits in external wiring When conducting any of the following operations turn OFF the power to the PC Electrocution product damage and malfunction may result Connecting or disconnecting Expansion I O Units Expansion Units and CPU Units e Assembling Units e Connecti
7. FG 7 FG 1 SG 3 SG 2 Hos FIDA 1 RDA SDA 4174 1 RDA 9 t 3 SDA Hoei 6 3 SDA SDB 5 4 SDB RS 232C RDB 5 4 SDB 5 NC CSB 7 5 NC B500 AL004 CPM2C CIF11 VERS CPM2C CIF11 1001 RS 422 1 RDA RS 422 1 RDA E 2 RDB co 2 RDB pora 3 SDA gt 3 SDA 11 H 4 SDB H 4 SDB o t L5 NC 2 11 111 GPM2C CIF11 Note Turn ON the terminating resistance in the last Unit for stable communications 133 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 10 Programming Device Connections Programming Console Use one of the connecting cables shown in the following diagram to connect a Programming Console to the CPM2C xr CQM1H PROO1 E with attached 2 m cable Main cable 2 m Peripheral port 2 111 0 15 m CPM2C CPU Unit Main cable 2 m CQM1 PRO01 E with attached 2 m cable CS1W CN114 0 05 m C200H CN222 2 m C200H CN422 4 m CS1W CN224 2 m CS1W CN624 6 m C200H PRO27 E CPM2C CIF01 134 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 One to one Computer Use one of the connecting cables shown in the following diagram to connect a Connection personal computer with Support Software to the CPM2C s RS 232C port for 1 1 Host Link communications or no protocol serial communications RS 232C Port Connection A personal computer can be connected to the CPU Unit s RS 232C
8. C500 ZL3AT1 E Model Number 2 1 3 5 2HD for PC AT compatible Specifications Expansion Memory Unit CPM1 EMU01 V1 Uploads the ladder program and DM 6144 to DM 6655 from the PC to the EEPROM and downloads the ladder program and DM 6144 to DM 6655 from the EEPROM to the PC 264 EEROM JD 256 Kbits Standard Models Adapters and Connecting Cables CPM2C commu nications port usage Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Appearance Model number 1 2 Comments Cable length For a 9 pin computer serial port Peripher al RS 232C Adapter Unit CPM2C CIF01 Use for peripheral port to RS 232C conversion RS 232C Cable XW2Z 2008 XW2Z 500S For 25 pin computer serial port 2m 5m XW2Z 2008 V XW2Z 500S V For a 9 pin computer serial port 2m 5m RS 232C Cables For use with the 1001 RS 422 Adapter XW2Z 070T 1 Use for CPM2C RS 232C port to NT AL001 connection 70 cm cable Model number NT ALO001 XW2Z 070T 1 Use for CPM2C RS 232C port to NT AL001 connection 2 m cable Specifications Use for CPM2C RS 232C port to RS 422A conversion Requires a 5 VDC 150 mA power supply which is supplied through the CPM2C connection Can also be connected to a personal computer but this connection requires an external 5 V
9. 190 4 5 5 Test Run in MONITOR 190 143 SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 4 1 4 1 SYSMAC CPT Support Software 4 1 1 Introduction The SYSMAC CPT Support Software is a complete programming and control package It provides not only programming capabilities but also advanced debugging monitoring and program data management The software is com patible with Windows 3 1 Windows 95 and Windows 98 Any version of the SYSMAC CPT Support Software can be used to program CPM2C PCs with the limitations described later in this section For further information and actual operating procedures please refer to the SYSMAC CPT Support Software Quick Start Guide W332 and User Manual W333 Refer to 3 4 10 Programming Device Connections for details on connecting a personal computer to the CPM2C 4 1 2 Limitations and Precautions When programming a CPM2C PC with the SYSMAC CPT Support Software set the PC model to CQM1 and the CPU model to CPU43 There are some software limitations because of differences between the CPM2C and CQM1 CPU43 CPUs Program Input and Program Check CQM1 data areas are larger than the corresponding CPM2C data areas so the data area addresses that don t actually exist in the CPM2C or instructions not supported by the 2 can be input and won t be detected in the program check Be sure that the word and bit addresses are within the
10. c202 c201 c200 0123 4567 89AB The Up and Down Arrow Keys can be used to shift one address up or down The status of the displayed words can be changed at this point Refer to 4 4 18 Three word Data Modification The display can be changed to display ASCII text which is useful when three consecutive words containing an ASCII message are displayed Refer to 4 4 26 Hex ASCII Display Change 3 Press the CLR Key to end 3 word monitoring and return to the normal moni toring display The rightmost word on the 3 word monitor display will be monitored EXT c200 89AB CLR The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode 4 4 16 Signed Decimal Monitor 176 1 2 3 This operation converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexa decimal two s complement format to signed decimal for display The opera tion can be executed while using monitoring multiple address monitoring or 3 word monitoring RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor with sign During mul tiple address monitoring the leftmost word will be converted c200 cL0020000 FFFO 0000 OFF Multiple address monitor Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 2 Press the SHIFT TR Keys to display the leftmost word as signed decimal CE SHIFT TR
11. 01 09 18 ro 16101 02 01 03 01 11 4 01 01 12 01 01X13 D 01_14 D 01 0 01 15 0 Y COM Terminal Blocks XW2D 20G6 Connecting Cable XW2Z A Sinking outputs Sourcing outputs 127 Wiring Connections Terminal Blocks XW2D 20G6 Connecting Cable G79 LIC 079 Section 3 4 Sinking outputs Sourcing outputs 00 B10 D o O OO o a B6 04 o o o o B5 o o B4 o o 0 B3 OO0O000 OO0OO000 B2 e o lt B1 Terminal Blocks XW2C 20G6 IO16 Connecting Cable XW2Z A Sinking outputs Sourcing outputs gs n OOOO M i
12. 08 EM 74 DM LR 00000 CHANNELLR 01 3 Press the MONTR Key to begin monitoring IMONTR cL01 FFFF The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the pre vious or next word The displayed word s status can be changed using the Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification operation Refer to Refer to 43 79 Hexadecimal BCD 173 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 Note Multiple Address Monitoring 1 2 3 Note Data Modification 4 3 20 Binary Data Modification 4 3 21 Singed Decimal Data Modification and 4 3 22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification for de tails 4 Press the CLR Key to end monitoring 00000 CHANNEL LR 01 CLR The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode The status of up to six bits and words can be monitored simultaneously although only three can be shown on the display at any one time 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the address of the first bit or word and press the MONTR Key TIM MONTRI T000 3 Repeat step 2 up to 6 times to display the next addresses to be monitored sHiet CONT 00001 000 0100 EM Liowrn D000000001 000 hom 0000 OFF 0100 If 4 or more bits and words are being monitored the bits and words that do not appear on the display can
13. 00005 4 7 36 00007 and up zs Specifications Input current Inputs 00000 to 00001 Specification Section 2 1 Units with 10 pts 8 mA typical Units with 20 pts Units with 32 pts 00002 to 00004 00002 10 00006 6 mA typical 6 mA typical 00005 and up 6 mA typical 00007 and up 5 mA typical 5 mA typical 00007 5 mA typical 00100 to 00107 5 mA typical ON voltage current 00000 to 00001 17 VDC min 5 mA 00002 and up 14 4 VDC min 3 5 mA OFF voltage current All 5 0 VDC max 1 1 mA ON delay All 1 to 80 ms max Default 10 ms See note OFF delay All 1 to 80 ms max Default 10 ms See note Circuit configuration Note 00000 to 00001 2 5 o i CPU Units with 10 points 00002 to 00004 CPU Units with 20 or 32 I O points 00002 to 00006 Internal circuits CPU Units with 10 points 00005 CPU Units with 20 points 00007 to 00011 CPU Units with 32 points 00007 and 00100 to 00107 Internal circuits input LEDS The input time constant can be set to 1 2 3 5 10 20 40 or 80 ms in the PC Setup 37 Specifications Section 2 1 High speed Counter Inputs The following
14. 1 2 24V 3 4 COM 24 VDC 5 6 Load 7 8 011 06 toad 1 9 101 0296 1 4 111 42 44 Toas 13 Sigo Toa 15 ho ioa i7 Ha za 24 19 20 91 00 Load Expansion Unit with 24 Points Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 24EDT1M Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 2 4 A common Outputs IR word n 1 2 3 ra COM 011107 5 6 m 7 8 01006 4 Loa 9 10 01005 _ 11 12 9195 Taaa 13 14 01003 d Loa 4 15 16 2 rosa 17 8 01001 19 20 21 99 123 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Expansion I O Unit with 32 I O Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 32EDTM Output capacity Max common capacity 00 to 07 300 mA 24 VDC 3 2 A common 08 to 15 100 mA ea VDC Outputs IR word n 24V 1 2 24V COM f pee pm 01 15 5 6 01107 toad l gm 01 114 7 8 01 106 toad l oaa 10 Moa 11 12 01104 Load 4 01 111 01 103 7 1 Load 13 14 Load 4 oag 1 15 16 01 02 Tr 21299 17 18 01 01 d I Load 01 0
15. 9 9 COM 24 V 9 9 COM 24 V INO 2 2 Not 24V 10 10 24 V 0 V 10 10 0V L IN 00 1 1 INoo _ NC 11 11 NC NC 11 11 NC NC 12 12 NC NC 12 12 NC 52 Unit Components Section 2 2 CPU Units with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector onnon CPM2C CPU Units with 10 I O Points CPM2C 10C DT M D Inputs IR 000 Outputs IR 010 00 20 19 NC Sinking CPM2C 10CLJDTM D Sourcing CPM2C 10CLJDT1M D 18 17 NC NC 1 2 24V NC 1 2 02 16 15 NC 3 4 3 4 COM 24 V 03 14 13 NC NC 5 6 NC NC 5 6 NC 04 12 11 NC 7 8 NC 7 8 NC 05 10 9 NC NC 9 10 NC NC 9 10 NC NC 8 7 NC NC 11 12 NC NC 11 12 NC NC 6 5 NC NC 13 14 OUT 03 NC 13 14 OUT 03 COM 4 3 NC NC 15 16 OUT 02 NC 15 16 OUT 02 NC 2 1 NC NC 17 18 OUT 01 NC 17 18 OUT 01 NC 19 20 OUT 00 NC 19 20 OUT 00 53 Unit Components Section 2 2 54 CPU Units with 20 1 0 Points CPM2C 20C DT M D Inputs IR 000 Outputs IR 01
16. Communications Unit control setting set to RUN Is there a write command YES Execute an operation command request to the component Execute write Is there a read command YES Execute read from the component NO Specify next Unit Completed 32 Units Write Simple Communications Unit status Unit Components and Functions Section 7 2 7 2 Unit Components and Functions The following diagram shows the major components of the Simple Communica tions Unit Front View 1 RS 422 RS 485 port 3 RS 422 RS 485 switch SW1 5 DM area setting switch SW2 1 2 RS 232C wane 4 CPU Unit Connector 6 Status indicators Side View Top View Cover 8 Terminating resistance switches SW4 7 Communications switch SW3 225 Unit Components and Functions Section 7 2 1 2 3 1 RS 422 RS 485 Port Connects to Temperature Controllers Electronic Timer Counters and Digi tal Panel Meters RS 422 Connection Example RS 485 Connection Example 226 Unit Components and Functions Section 7 2 Note RS 422 and RS 485 communications cannot be used together RS 422 Interface Block Diagram C5V TxD SE RxD o
17. Mode switch Operation keys LCD display PROGRAM Mode switch Operation keys Cassette recorded jack Cannot be used with the CPM2C Connecting Cables C200H CN222 2 m C200H CN422 4 m CS1W CN224 2 m CS1W CN624 6 m 157 Using Programming Console Section 4 3 Different Keys Note Mode Switch Contrast Control Buzzer Volume Note 158 The following keys are labeled differently on the CQM1 PROO1 E and the C200H PRO27 E but the operation of the keys in each pair is identical CQM1 PROO1 E Keys C200H PRO27 E Keys To specify the AR area use SHIFT and HR Keys for the C200H PRO27 E and use SHIFT and AR HR Keys for the CQM1 PROO1 E A shift symbol will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen when the Shift Key is pressed The shift input can be cleared by pressing the Shift Key again Shift input Y symbol The mode switch controls the CPM2C s operating mode The key can be re moved when the switch is set to RUN or MONITOR but it cannot be removed when the switch is set to PROGRAM The display contrast can be adjusted with the control on the right side of the Pro gramming Console Contrast control The C200H PRO27 E s buzzer volume can be adjusted with the l
18. Wire COM terminals 9 and B9 and 24 V terminals A10 and B10 even though they are connected internally Expansion Unit with 16 Sourcing Output Points CPM2C 16ET1C Output capacity Max common capacity 00 to 07 300 mA 24 VDC 3 2 A common 08 to 15 100 mA e VDC Outputs IR word n A Wire COM terminals A9 and B9 and 0 terminals A10 and B10 even though they are connected internally 119 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Units with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector CPU Units with 10 I O Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 10C IDTM D Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 1 2 A common Outputs IR 010 1 21 24 4 Mal e 24 VDC 7 8 9 10 H1 12 413 etter 15 601902115884 zl 181 019 aegis 9 50121000 ert CPU Units with 10 I O Points Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 10C IDT1M D Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 1 2 A common Outputs IR 010 ER Wie 3 4 9n 5 6 24 VDC 7 8 9 10 11 12 01003 13 14 Load 17 Tatria 19 20 01000 Load Section 3 4 Wiring Connections CPU Units with 20 I O
19. 00016 At this point the contents of the displayed word can be changed with a signed decimal input Refer to 4 4 22 Signed Decimal Data Modification 3 Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal dis play and return to normal monitoring c200 cL0020000 FFFO 0000 OFF CLR 4 4 17 Unsigned Decimal Monitor 1 2 3 This operation is used to convert hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned decimal for display The operation can be executed while using I O monitor ing multiple address monitoring or 3 word monitoring RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor without sign During multiple address monitoring the leftmost word will be converted c200 cL0020000 FFFO 0000 OFF Multiple address monitoring 2 Press the SHIFT TR NOT Keys to display the leftmost word as unsigned decimal c200 At this point the contents of the displayed word be changed with an un signed decimal input Refer to 4 4 23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification 3 Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal dis play and return to normal monitoring 200 cL0020000 FFFO 0000 OFF CLR 4 4 18 Three Word Data Modification Z N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the contents of one or more of the 3 con secutive words displayed in the Three Word Monitor operati
20. Control data area Simple Communications Unit control Simple Communications Unit status Syntax error address Unit number 0 to 31 communications control Unit 0 communications type Starting address of Unit 0 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 0 ur write variable type area Unit 1 communications type Starting address of Unit 1 read data area Starting address of Unit 1 write data area Unit 31 communications type Starting address of Unit 31 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 31 write variable type area 995525 Si Ie Siecle WWW SS 2 SYSWAY Read variable type area Number of read items Read data area Reserved Response monitor Starting address of read data area Component status Variable 1 type Variable 1 read data lower bytes Variable 1 address Variable 1 read data upper bytes Variable 12 type Variable 12 read data lower bytes Variable 12 address Variable 12 read data upper bytes Write variable type area Number of write items Write data area Operation command Response monitor Starting address of write data area Operation command
21. Power supply Note Note 130 200009900 890099 The IR area addresses that be used vary with the Unit used as shown in the following table CPU Unit with 10 I O points Input IR area addresses IR 00000 to IR 00005 Output IR area addresses IR 01000 to IR 01003 CPU Unit with 20 I O points IR 00000 to IR 00011 IR 01000 to IR 01007 CPU Unit with 32 I O points IR 00000 to IR 00007 IR 00100 to IR 00107 See note IR 01000 to IR 01007 IR 01100 to IR 01107 See note Expansion I O Unit with 10 points 00100 to IR 00 010100 to IR 011103 Expansion I O Unit with 24 points 007700 to IR 00 011100 to IR 01 Expansion Unit with 32 points 00100 to IR 00 IR 010100 to IR 01 Expansion I O Unit with 8 input points IR 00L100 to IR 00 Expansion Unit with 16 input points IR 00 00 to IR 00 Expansion I O Unit with 8 output points 00 to IR 01 Expansion Unit with 16 output points For CPU Units with 32 I O points 00 IR 00100 to IR 00107 and 01 IR 01100 to IR 01107 08 to 00 08 to 01 00 to IR 01 15 in the diagram correspond to 15 in the diagram corres
22. 4 wire com munications Setting not possible Setting not possible 2 wire com munications SW1 Factory setting 1 ON 2 ON 3 OFF 4 ON Note All pins are turned OFF at the factory 72 Do not turn ON both SW1 3 and SW1 4 at the same time Doing so will destroy internal circuits When using 2 wire RS 485 communications turn OFF SW1 3 SW1 3 OFF ON Setting not possible Data can be received at any time RS control enabled for CPU Unit Setting not possible and turn ON SW1 4 5 Communications Switch SW3 Setting Baud rate with CPU Unit 9 600 bps 19 200 bps Baud rate with components Normal 9 600 bps 19 200 bps High speed 38 400 bps 57 600 bps Data length with components 7 bits 8 bits Parity 1 setting with components Yes None Parity 2 setting with components Even Stop bits with components 2 Not used Always leave pin 7 OFF Leave OFF Component communications speed 6 DM Area Setting Switch SW2 Sets the starting word in the DM Area Normal High speed Unit Components Section 2 2 Setting Starting word in DM Area DM 0000 DM 0100 DM 0200 DM 0300 DM 0400 DM 0500 DM 0600 DM 0700 DM 0800 DM 0900 DM 1000 DM 1100 DM 1200 DM 1300 DM 1400 DM 1500
23. A 00202 MOV DATA B us LR 10 Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory The next program address will be displayed 00203READ WRITE NOP 000 Note When the default display value is 000 a word address can be input immediately without pressing the Shift and CH Keys 12 Input the next instruction vw Fa 00203 cooki Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory _ 00203 ADB DATA A pers e Writing an Unsigned Decimal Number Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 13 The first operand is input as an unsigned integer uer 00203 ADB DATA A mee 00000 Input the value of the operand from 0 to 65535 YF 00203 ADB DATA 100250 Note If an erroneous input is made press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input Then enter the correct input 14 Restore the hexadecimal display 00203 ADB DATA A SHIFT TR Note If an input is made outside of the permissible range a buzzer will sound and the hexadecimal display will not be displayed 00203 ADB DATA B WRITE 15 The second operand is input as a signed integer CONT 00203 ADB DATA B CONT TR Input the value of the operand from 32 768 to 32 767 Use the SET Key to input a positive number and use the RESET Key to input a negative number 00203 ADB DATA B No
24. 3 Timeout error occurred E999 Indicates that there was no response from the component Component Status Offset 1 163 Component status Contain the controller status of the component Read Data Offset 2 4 22 and 24 The read data is contained in two words starting at offset 2 x n n variable num ber Note Offset 2xn n variable number 0000 to FFFF Hex Function Contains the lower rightmost two bytes of the data Data is expressed in 2 s complement signed binary format 2xn 4 1 n variable number 0000 to FFFF Hex Contains the upper leftmost two bytes of the data Data is expressed in 2 s complement signed binary format The variable data read from a component can have a value ranging from 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF The read data will be 0000 0000 if a communications error occurred The following example shows the contents of the read data area when a communications error occurred while reading the variable 2 read data Response Monitor Area Contains the error code e Status Contains the controller status e Read data 1 e Read data 2 e Remaining read items Contains the data read from the component Contains 0000 0000 Contain 0000 0000 1 The decimal point position has to be managed by the user since the compo nent s decimal point position is not transferred in CompoWay F communica tions 2 BCD format is used wi
25. AR oO e OOODODOOOOO 128 Wiring Connections Relay Terminal G7TC OC08 Relay Terminal G7TC OC16 Section 3 4 Relay Terminal G7TC OC16 1 Connecting Cable G79 C G79 OLTLIC G79 O Connecting Cable G79 L 1C Connecting Cable G79 1C G79 OLTLIC Sinking outputs only Power supply 01L 07 Sinking outputs only Power supply 4 aa AB o PM 01 14 T 0 3 01 2 1 a gt 0 D 0 0 e Relay Terminals G70D SOC16 G70D FOM16 Sourcing outputs only Power supply 15 14 13 12 11 10 wo Oa ai nw Relay Terminal G70D SOC16 1 G70D FOM 16 1 Connecting Cable G79 C 679 Connec
26. Variable 1 type Variable 1 write data lower bytes Variable 1 address Variable 1 write data upper bytes Variable 12 type Variable 12 write data lower bytes Variable 12 address Variable 12 write data upper bytes Read data area Response monitor Present temperature Display value lower bytes Status Display value upper bytes Target temperature Status Alarm 1 SV Peak hold setting lower bytes Alarm 2 SV Peak hold setting upper bytes Proportional band lower bytes data for Digital Panel Meters Write data area Note The values in parentheses show the read Response monitor Target temperature Reset control Operation command Comparison value HH lower bytes Alarm 1 SV Comparison value HH upper bytes Alarm 2 SV Comparison value H lower bytes Proportional band Comparison value H upper bytes data for Digital Panel Meters Note The values in parentheses show the write The following diagram shows the structure of the DM area used for communica 223 Introduction Section 7 1 Flow of Data Processing 224 The following flowchart shows the flow of data processing Power application Read DM start area l Specify Unit 0 Read Simple Communications Unit control setting
27. n a eee Geb xvi SECTION 1 Introduction 4252s zu Eus Rs 1 1 1 CPM2C Features and Functions 2 1 2 System Configurations 1 8 1 5 Structure and Operation 12 1 4 Functions Listed by 19 1 5 Comparison with the and 2 21 1 6 Preparation for 28 1 7 SWZ Ru ee ree Ee 29 SECTION 2 Unit Components and Specifications 33 2 1 Specifications tq E She ERO ERA I RR RR ROADS edocet 34 2 2 Unit Components ssp p WEN GU E eg 45 SECTION 3 Installation and Wiring 79 3 1 Design Precautionis cse 88 4 ae RN Use E Te eS we UR 80 3 2 Selecting an Installation Site 81 3 3 Installing the 2 dr ee Pee bs Ge UT ES Aer 82 3 4 Wiring and Connections 85 SECTION 4 Using Programming Devices 143 4 1 SYSMAC CPT Support Software 144 4 2 SYSMAC Support Software SSS
28. 12 Expansion Connector Connects the PC s CPU Unit to an Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit Up to 5 Expansion Units and Expansion Units be connected to a CPU Unit A cover for the expansion connector is included with the CPU Unit 47 Unit Components Section 2 2 Terminal and Connector Pin Allocation CPU Units with Relay Outputs via Terminal Block CPU Units with 10 I O Points CPM2C 10C 48 DR D Cm Ju m Inputs IR 000 Outputs IR 010 COM 7 1 OUT 00 05 6 2 04 5 3 OUTO INOS 4 4 02 3 5 COUT 02 01 2 6 OUT 03 00 1 7 Shared common Unit Components Section 2 2 CPU Units with 20 I O Points CPM2C 20C DR D Inputs IR 000 Outputs IR 010 COM 13 1 OUT O00 IN 11 12 2 00 01 IN 10 11 3 COM 09 10 4 COUT 02 08 9 5 OUT 03 INO7 8 6 COM INO6 7 7 OUT 04 INOS 6 OUT 05 IN 04 5 9 COM INOS 4 10 OUT 06 IN 02 3 11 OUT 07 IN 01 2 12 COM IN 00 1 13 COM Shared common Shared common Shared common Shared common 49 Unit Components Section 2 2 CPU Units with Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Connector
29. connector output 7 Locking lever 1 2 3 1 Input Terminals Connector Connects the CPU Unit to external input devices 2 Output Terminals Connector Connects the CPU Unit to external output devices 3 Input Indicators The input indicators are lit when the corresponding input terminal is ON Note Input indicators will reflect the status of the corresponding inputs even when the PC is stopped but the corresponding input bits will not be refreshed 56 Unit Components Section 2 2 4 Output Indicators The output indicators are lit when the corresponding output terminal is ON 5 Expansion I O Connector Input Connects the Expansion I O Unit to the CPU Unit or the previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I O Unit Note The indicators are lit during I O refreshing The status of an output in dicator will also reflect the status of the corresponding output when the output is being used as a pulse output 6 Expansion I O Connector Output Connects the Expansion I O Unit to the next Expansion I O Unit or Expan sion Unit if necessary Up to 5 Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a CPU Unit Only 10 words however can be allocated for input and output A cover for the expansion I O connector is not included with the Expansion Unit Use the cover included with the CPU Unit to cover the unused expansion I O connector on
30. Responses Up to 32 PCs can be connected The TXD 48 and RXD 47 instructions can be used in no protocol mode to ex change data with standard serial devices For example data can be received from a bar code reader or transmitted to a serial printer The serial devices can be connected to the communications port as a RS 232C or peripheral port Inputting data from Outputting data to a bar code reader Barcode reader a serial printer printer In a 1 1 NT Link an OMRON Programmable Terminal PT can be connected directly to the CPM2C The PT must be connected to the communications port as an RS 232C port not as a peripheral port OMRON PT UNUS 2 be linked directly to another 2 1 CPM1 CPM2A SRM1 V2 or a C200HS C200HX HG HE The 1 1 PC Link al 2 Features Functions Section 1 1 Expansion Memory Unit Expansion Memory Unit EEPROM Indicator UPLOAD DM Button 1 1 2 Overview of lows automatic data link connections The PC must be connected to the commu nications port as an RS 232C port not as a peripheral port The CPM1 EMU01 V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for small size or micro PCs Using the CPM1 EMU01 V1 simple on site transfer of user programs and data memory is possible with PCs s i Daan CPM2C CN111 CS1W CN114
31. SCALING SCL2 SIGNED BINARY BCD SCALING SCL3 BCD TO SIGNED BINARY SCALING SRCH DATA SEARCH FIND MAXIMUM FIND MINIMUM SUM SUM CALCULATION FCS CALCULATE ASCII TO HEXADECIMAL AVERAGE VALUE PULSE WITH VARIABLE DUTY RATIO PID CONTROL AREA RANGE COMPARE DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE 2 S COMPLEMENT ACCELERATION CONTROL CHANGE RS 232C SETUP SYNCHRONIZED PULSE CONTROL BINL 58 DOUBLE BCD TO DOUBLE BINARY BCDL 59 DOUBLE BINARY TO DOUBLE BCD TMHH VERY HIGH SPEED TIMER TIML LONG TIMER SEC HOURS TO SECONDS HMS SECONDS TO HOURS Instructions with Changed Specifications Mnemonic CPM2C CPM1A INI 61 MODE CONTROL Supports the interrupt input counter mode PV Does not support these change operation operations Supports the pulse output PV change operation Supports the pulse synchronization control stop operation HIGH SPEED Supports the interrupt input counter mode PV read Does not support these COUNTER PV READ operation operations Supports the pulse output PV read operation COMPARISON TABLE The count is compared with all of the target values The count is compared LOAD in the target value comparison table with each target value in the order that they appear in the target value comparison table PULS 65 SET PULSES Supports absolute pulse sp
32. Unit 25 Read Command Bit Unit 1 Write Command Bit Unit 9 Write Command Bit Unit 17 Write Command Bit Unit 25 Write Command Bit Unit 0 Read Command Bit Unit 8 Read Command Bit Unit 16 Read Command Bit Unit 24 Read Command Bit Write Command Bit Unit 0 Write Command Bit 0 Writing prohibited 1 Writing allowed Unit 8 Write Command Bit is set to 0 page 244 for details Unit 16 Write Command Bit Function Unit 24 Write Command Bit Setting this bit to 1 allows operation commands and data writes to the component with the corresponding unit number Data is not written when this bit When an error occurs while writing data the appropriate error code is written to the write data area s response monitor area See Response Monitor Area on Read Command Bit 0 Reading prohibited 1 Reading allowed page 242 for details Setting this bit to 1 allows data to be read from the component with the corresponding unit number Data is not read when this bit is set to 0 When an error occurs while reading data the appropriate error code is written to the read data area s response monitor area See Response Monitor Area on Note When frequently sending data to a Temperature Controller because there are restrictions on the number of times data can be written to the Temperature Con troller s non volatile memory either set the Write Command Bit to 0 after writing is c
33. c Do not change the setting of SW2 when a Programming Console CPM2C CIF01 CPM2C CIF11 CQM1 CIF01 OR COM1 CIFO2 is con nected Communications will be disconnected if the switch setting is changed causing a communications error or causing the Programming Console not to respond i e the display will not change when keys are pressed Connect the Programming Console to the CPM2C as shown below The CQM1H PROO1 E can be connected directly to the CPM2C S Peripheral port to communications port CPM2C CPU Unit omron 2 Connecting Cable C200H CN222 or C200H CN422 Connecting Cable CS1W CN224 or CS1W CN624 eripheral port to Connecting Cable communications CQM1 PRO27 E port Note The C200H PRO27 E can be con nected directly to the CPM2C if the CS1W CN224 or CS1W CN624 Connecting Cable is used CPM2C CIFO1 Note 1 Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port The CPM2C CN111 Con necting Cable cannot be connected to the RS 232C port 2 If the Programming Console is reconnected within 2 seconds of being dis connected the previous display will be maintained and the password will not need to be input It is also possible to disconnect and reconnect the Pro gramming Console without loosing the current display during long opera tions such as program checks 155 Using Programming Console Section 4 3 Panel Installation T
34. its cause and clear the error Follow the Memory Error Check flowchart if a memory error has occurred Switch to RUN or MONITOR mode Is the RUN indicator lit Unit Replace the CPU Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 5 5 Non fatal Error Check ERR ALM indicator flashing Determine the cause of the error with a Programming Device Is a non fatal error indicated Identify the error eliminate its cause and clear the error Is the ERR AL indicator flashing Not lit Replace the CPU Unit 201 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 5 5 Check The I O check flowchart is based on the following ladder diagram section LS1 LS2 00002 00003 SOL1 01003 SOL1 malfunction Malfunction of SOL1 IR 01003 output indicator operating normally Check the voltage at the Wire correctly Monitor the ON OFF IR 01003 terminals status of IR 01003 with a Programming Device Operation OK Is output wiring Operation OK correct To next page Disconnect the external wires and check the conductivity of each wire Operation OK Replace the CPU Unit Ex one guiput device pansion Unit or Expansion Unit with the problem 202 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 5 5 No Are the IR 00002 and IR 00003 input indi cators operating normally rom previous Yes page Check the voltage at Check the voltag
35. 00006 can be used as interrupt inputs 38 Specifications Section 2 1 Expansion Unit Input Specifications Input voltage Specification 24 VDC 10 Input impedance 4 7 KQ Input current 5 mA typical ON voltage current 14 4 VDC min 3 5 mA OFF voltage current 5 0 VDC max 1 1 mA ON delay 1 to 80 ms max Default 10 ms See note OFF delay 1 to 80 ms max Default 10 ms See note Circuit configuration Note Internal circuits Input LED F y The input time constant can be set to 1 2 3 5 10 20 40 or 80 ms in the PC Setup 39 Specifications Section 2 1 CPU Unit and Expansion Unit Output Specifications Relay Outputs Max switching capacity Specification 2 A 250 VAC 1 2A 24 VDC 4 A common Min switching capacity 10 mA 5 VDC Service life of relay See note Electrical 150 000 operations 24 VDC resistive load 100 000 operations 240 VAC inductive load 0 4 Mechanical 20 000 000 operations ON delay 15 ms max OFF delay Circuit configuration 40 Internal circuits Internal circuits Output Specifications Section 2 1 Note The service life of relay output contacts shown in the table assumes the worst conditions The following graph shows the results of OMRON s service life tests at a switching rate of 1 800 time
36. 195 Programming Errors Section 5 4 5 3 Programming Console Operation Errors Note The following error messages may appear when performing operations on the Programming Console Correct the error as indicated and continue operation Message Meaning and appropriate response REPL ROM An attempt was made to write to write protected memory Set bits 00 to 03 of DM 6602 to 0 PROG OVER The instruction at the last address in memory is not NOP 00 Erase all unnecessary instructions after END 01 ADDR OVER An address was set that is larger than the highest memory address in Program Memory Input a smaller address SETDATA ERR FALS 00 has been input and 00 cannot be input Reinput the data NO ERR A data area address has been designated that exceeds the limit of the data area e g an address is too large Confirm the requirements for the instruction and re enter the address Refer to the relevant Support Software Operation Manual for details on errors that may appear when operating the SSS or SYSMAC CPT Support Software 5 4 Programming Errors 196 These errors in program syntax will be detected when the program is checked using the Program Check operation Three levels of program checking are available The desired level must be des ignated to indicate the type of errors that are to be detected The following table provides the error types displays and explanations
37. 2 111 0 1 RE Connecting Cable XW2Z 200T 2 m Di XW2Z 500T 5 m CS1W CN118 CS1W CN118 0 1 m 0 1 m CPM2C CIFO1 CPM2C CIFO1 Hi CPM2C CIF11 CPM2C CIF11 CPM2C CIF21 CPM2C CIF21 OMRON CQM1 CPM1 OMRON PC CQM1 CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C S SRM1 V2 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C S SRM1 V2 C200HS or C200HX HE HG C200HS or C200HX HE HG Note Even though the peripheral port on the CPM2C CIF01 can output RS 232C this port cannot be used for one to one link communications 3 4 14 CompoBus S I O Link Connections A CompoBus S I O Link be used to create an link remote I O of 8 input points and 8 output points with a CompoBus S Master Unit or SRM1 PC The connection is made through a CompoBus S Link Unit 140 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 From the standpoint of the CPM2C CPU Unit the area allocated to the Compo Bus S I O Link Unit can be treated just like the area allocated to an Expansion I O Unit The difference is that the bits are not actual I O points but I O bits in the Master Unit CompoBus S Master Unit or SRM1 PC C200HX HG HE PC CPM2C CPU Unit CompoBus S I O Link Unit TN Slave eee Cables Use special flat cable or VCTF cable to connect the nodes in the CompoBus S Link Special flat cables and VCTF cables cannot be combined in the same System Spec
38. CPM2C 24EDT1M 32 I O points 16 inputs 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32EDTM 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1M 8 input points 8 inputs 24 VDC CPM2C 8EDM 16 input points 16 inputs 24 VDC CPM2C 16EDM 8 output points 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 8ETM 8 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 8ET1M 16 output points 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 16ETM 2 5001 Temperature Sensor Unit 2 analog inputs 1 analog output fa fal Lal al ol a Max number of Units 2 points 2 words allocated 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C SRT21 CompoBus S I O Link Unit Vim 5 Outputs 1 point 1 word allocated CPM2C 16ET1M CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit CPM2C MAD11 Temperature Sensor Unit 2 thermocouple inputs 2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs 2 points 2 words allocated 2 5001 2 points 2 words allocated CPM2C TS101 CompoBus S I O Link Unit 8 input points and 8 output points for the built in outputs and inputs of the Master Unit 8 points 1 word allocated Inputs from the Master 8 points 1 word allocated Outputs to the Master CPM2C SRT21 Simple Communications Unit See notes 1 and 2 CPM2C CIF21 11 Structure and Operation Sect
39. Comparison value LL Operation command Comparison value HH Comparison value H Comparison value L Comparison value LL Starting Address of Read Data Area or Read Variable Type Area Offset 8 11 98 and 101 Use the following equation to calculate the offset for a given unit number Offset 8 3 x unit number Setting Function Starting Address of 0000 to 9999 BCD Specifies the starting DM address in the CPU Unit s DM area where Read Data Area DM address the data read from the component will be stored SYSWAY protocol A syntax error will occur if the starting address specified in this word is not BCD Starting Address of 0000 to 9999 BCD Specifies the starting DM address of the words that show which Read Variable Type Area DM address variables will be read from the component The data that will be read from the component is determined by the variable type and address written in the variable type area A syntax error will occur if the starting address specified in this word is not BCD CompoWay F protocol Starting Address of Write Data Area or Write Variable Type Area Offset 9 12 99 and 102 Use the following equation to calculate the offset for a given unit number Offset 9 3 x unit number Setting Function Starting Address of Write 0000 to 9999 BCD Specifies the starting DM address in the CPU Uni
40. Connect the CPM1 EMU01 V1 to the PC s communications port peripheral port After 2 or 3 s check if the indicator is lit green See the note No on the right Yes Select the memory area to be uploaded Upload only the ladder DM 6655 program Press the UPLOAD DM Press the UPLOAD But Button ton Check if the indicator is blinking green indicating that uploading has started eee See the note above No Yes r sien odes mm Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1 EMUO1 V1 before connecting to the PC eu e eens get ee eee ene Cae Stee eae ee a Check the orientation of the connector before connecting the CPM1 EMUO1 V1 i Ke es emi ep A Note If the indicator is not lit at all lit red or blinks red uploading will not be pos sible In this case check the follow ing items 15 the connector properly con nected i Is the EEPROM properly mounted Are the EEPROM specifications cor rect Are the peripheral port communica tions settings correct Upload both the ladder program and DM 6144 to Check if the indicator is lit green in dicating that uploading has been suc cessfully completed See the note above Remove the Expansion Memory Unit from the PC 6 3 4 Downloading Programs Ladder programs and t
41. Display value Upper bytes Display value status Peak hold Lower bytes Peak hold Upper bytes Peak hold status Bottom hold Lower bytes Bottom hold Upper bytes Bottom hold status Comparison value HH Lower bytes Comparison value HH Upper bytes Comparison value H Lower bytes Comparison value H Upper bytes Comparison value L Lower bytes Comparison value L Upper bytes Comparison value LL Lower bytes Comparison value LL Upper bytes 280 DM Settings Assignment Sheets Appendix C Write Data Area Host Link Temperature Controllers Contents Command group 3 4 Response monitor area Written Written Written Written Written Target temperature SV Written Written Written Written Written Operation Command Written Written Written Written Alarm 1 SV Written Written Written Alarm 2 SV Written Written Written Proportional band Written Written Reset time Written Written Derivative time Written Written Heater burnout detection value Written Contents 4 Response monitor area Written Written Written Operation Command Written Written Comparison value HH Lower bytes 2 Written Written Comparison value HH Upper bytes Comparison value H Lower bytes Written Written Comparison value H Upper bytes Comparison value L Lower bytes Written Written Compariso
42. N WARNING The backup battery may explode catch fire or leak if dropped broken apart 1 2 3 crushed short circuited recharged heated to 100 C or higher or burned If power has not been supplied to the for some time turn ON the power sup ply for at least 5 minutes to charge the backup capacitor before replacing the battery Turn OFF the power supply to the PC before replacing the battery To protect the contents of memory this procedure must be completed within 5 minutes A label has been included to remind the user when the battery needs to be re placed After replacing the battery write the next date that the battery should be replaced on the label and affix the label in a visible place such as the inside of the communications port cover Be sure to dispose of the old battery in accordance with local laws and regula tions 2 1 Backup Battery is built into CPU Units that are equipped with an internal clock Replace the battery within two years when used under 25 C When the battery voltage drops the ERR ALM indicator will flash and SR 25308 will be turned ON Refer to page 195 In this case replace the battery within seven days Use the procedure below when replacing the battery 1 Stop CPM2C operation and turn OFF the power supply 2 Remove the battery cover with a flat blade screwdriver s Battery cover 4 Install the new battery Be sure that the connector is aligned correctly
43. Recommended wire size 0 3 to 1 65 mm AWG 22 to 16 Terminals can also be wired with solid wires The recommended wire size is 0 6 to 1 6 mm diameter AWG 22 to 14 Grounding To prevent electric shock resulting from malfunction due to factors such as noise connect to a ground of 100 O or less When grounding use a wire at least 1 25 mm thick NWARNING Connect the ground terminal of the Power Supply Unit to a ground of 100 or less when installing the Unit Not connecting to a ground of 100 O or less may result in electric shock Ground of 100 or less Power Supply Wiring To prevent voltage drops caused by startup currents and inrush currents from other devices wire the power supply circuits of the CPM2C separately from power line circuits When using several CPM2C s together it is recommended that circuits are wired separately in order to prevent circuit breaker malfunctions voltage drops due to inrush current Twist power supply lines to prevent noise from the power supply lines Noise can further be prevented by wiring via a 1 1 isolation transformer 87 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 88 NWARNING N WARNING N WARNING Use wires at least 1 25 mm thick in order to allow for voltage drops and to keep the current within the allowable level Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to a torque of 0 74 to 0 9 Nem Loose screws may result in
44. Set this information in the read write variable type area 3 When writing data set the data that you want to write in the write data area 7 5 2 Starting Communications with the Components 250 1 2 3 Note Use the following procedure to start communications with the components 1 Set the rightmost digit of the Simple Communications Unit control word in the Control Data Area the RUN Stop digit to 1 RUN 2 Turn ON the Read Command Bit or Write Command Bit of the desired com ponent These bits are in the Control Data Area with word offsets 3 4 5 and 6 See Communications Control Bits on page 237 Changes to the following values are recognized only when the Simple Commu nications Unit control word s RUN Stop digit is switched from Stop to RUN When one of these values has been changed switch the Simple Communica tions Unit from RUN to Stop and then back to RUN again Segment information Command group Communications protocol Starting addresses of read write data areas Starting addresses of read write variable type areas Refer to Simple Communications Unit Control on page 235 for details on the RUN Stop Digit Precautions for Component Communications Section 7 6 7 6 Precautions for Component Communications Time Required to Refresh Read Write Data Establishment of Communications with the CPU Unit Operating Mode of the CPU Unit Switching the Simple Communic
45. Switch settings PC settings Component settings DM settings I Communications with components 7 3 1 Unit Connections Connect the Simple Communications Unit to the PC s CPU Unit Power is sup plied from the CPU Unit to the Simple Communications Unit through the commu nications cable 230 Preparation for Operation Section 7 3 Connect components through their RS 422 or RS 485 interfaces Up to 32 com ponents can be connected Simple Commu CPU Unit nications Unit RS 422 or RS 485 Up to 32 components When the CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit is connected to the CPU Unit a computer or Programmable Terminal can be connected to the RS 232C port on the front of the CPM2C CIF21 A Programming Console cannot be con nected while the CPM2C CIF21 is being used because the CPM2C CIF21 oc cupies the peripheral port 7 3 2 Switch Settings RS 422 RS 485 Switch This switch determines whether components are connected to the Simple Com SW1 munications Unit through an RS 485 interface or RS 422 interface When the RS 485 interface is being used set SW1 3 OFF and SW1 4 ON so that data is received continuously The following table shows the factory default RS 485 settings Default setting Function RS 485 interface 2 wire communications Reception permitted after sending of data is completed
46. UPLOAD Button CPM2C Functions CPM2C CIFO1 Main function Variations Details Interrupts Interrupt inputs 2 inputs in CPU Units with 10 points 4 inputs in CPU Units with 20 32 points Response time 0 3 ms Interval timer interrupts 1 input Set value 0 5 to 319 968 ms Precision 0 1 ms Scheduled interrupts One shot interrupt High speed counters High speed counter 1 input see note 1 Differential phase mode 5 kHz Pulse plus direction input mode 20 kHz Up down input mode 20 kHz Increment mode 20 kHz No interrupt Count check interrupt An interrupt can be generated when the count equals the set value or the count lies within a preset range Interrupt inputs counter mode 2 inputs in CPU Units with 10 I O points 4 inputs in CPU Units with 20 32 points Incrementing counter 2 kHz Decrementing counter 2 kHz No interrupt Count up interrupt 2 Features and Functions Section 1 1 Main function Variations Details Pulse outputs 2 outputs Single phase pulse output without acceleration deceleration See note 2 10 Hz to 10 kHz 2 outputs Variable duty ratio pulse output See note 2 0 1 to 999 9 Hz duty ratio 0 to 100 1 output Pulse output with trapezoidal acceleration deceleration See note 2 Pulse plus direction output up down pulse output 10 Hz to 10 kHz Synchronized pulse control 1 point see notes 1 a
47. lt MONITOR gt BZ CLR SHIFT CLR 2 Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key to turn off the buzzer lt MONITOR gt IH The buzzer will not sound when BZ is not displayed 3 Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key again to turn the buzzer back ON MONITOR BZ sHIFT 71 4 4 5 Assigning Expansion Instruction Function Codes 1 2 3 This operation is used to display or change the expansion instructions assigned to expansion instruction function codes The assignments can be displayed in any mode but be changed in PROGRAM mode only MONTOR PROGRAM Read assignment OK Change assignment No No OR Assign expansion instruction function codes before inputting the program CPM2C will not operate properly if expansion instructions aren t as signed correctly An expansion instruction can be assigned to one function code only The PC Setup must be set for user defined expansion instruction assign ments Set bits 8 to 11 of DM 6602 to 1 and turn the PC s power off and then on again to enable the new setting There is a table on page 145 showing the default function code assignments in the CPM2C Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the EXT Key to display the assignment for the first function code 17 m INST TBL READ G FUN017 ASFT 3 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instruc tion functi
48. 00C8 20000 Initial settings completed flag 20000 DMO0000 C500 DMO0003 Sets Simple Communications Unit to RUN 00005 This input condition IR 00005 turns ON the Unit 0 Write Command Bit 259 Standard Models CPU Units Classification and Appearance Units with Terminal Blocks capacity 10 I O points 6 points 24 VDC Outputs 4 relay outputs CPM2C 10CDR D CPM2C 10C1DR D 20 I O points 12 points 24 VDC 8 relay outputs CPM2C 20CDR D CPM2C 20C1DR D Units with Fujitsu compatible Connectors 10 I O points 6 points 24 VDC 4 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 10CDTC D CPM2C 10C1DTC D 4 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 10CDT1C D CPM2C 10C1DT1C D 20 I O points 12 points 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 20CDTC D CPM2C 20C1DTC D 8 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 20CDT1C D CPM2C 20C1DT1C D 32 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32CDTC D 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32CDT1C D Units with MIL Connectors 10 points 6 points 24 VDC 4 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 10CDTM D CPM2C 10C1DTM D 4 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 10CDT1M D CPM2C 10C1DT1M D 20 I O points 12 points 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 20CD
49. 01003 4 Term 01L106 9 7 9 10 11 12 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 Note Note Expansion I O Unit with 32 I O Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 32EDTC Output capacity Max common capacity 00 to 07 300 mA 24 VDC 08 to 15 100 mA 24 VDC 3 2 Outputs IR word n 01000 1 1 01008 Teen 01001 2 2 01009 Toad H 01002 3 3 01010 iak 01008 4 4 01011 4 01004 5 5 01012 Lad 01005 6 6 01013 ia 01006 7 7 01014 4 01007 rg 01015 Toa H COM ro gceo i TES 24V 10 10 24V 24 VDC nom 12 12 Wire COM terminals A9 and B9 and 24 V terminals A10 and B10 even though they are connected internally Expansion I O Unit with 32 I O Points Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 32EDT1C Output capacity Max common capacity 00 to 07 300 mA 24 VDC 08 to 15 100 mA 24 VDC 3 2 Outputs IR word n 1Load 1Load Load A B 011 00 1 1 00 108 Temi 01 01 2 2 001 09 Load 01 102 3 3 00710 Load 01103 4 4 00111 Load H 01104 5 5 001 12 01 1
50. 50 CPU Units with 10 I O Points CPM2C 10C DT C D Inputs IR 000 Outputs IR 010 B A Sinking CPM2C 10C 2DTC D Sourcing CPM2C 10CCIDT1C D NC 12 12 Nc B B NC 11 11 NC OUT 00 1 1 NC OUT 00 1 1 NC NC flol hol Nc OUT 01 2 2 NC OUT 01 2 2 NC NC 9 9 OUT 02 3 3 NC OUT 02 3 3 NC NC 8 8 Nc OUT 03 4 4 NC OUT 03 4 4 NC NC 7 7 NC 5 5 NC 5 5 NC NC e 6 05 NC 6 6 NC 6 6 NC 5 5 04 7 7 NC 7 7 NC NC 4 4 03 NC 8 8 NC 8 8 NC NC 3 3 INO2 COM 9 9 0 24 9 9 Nc 2 2 INOI 24V 10 10 10 Mol uc 1 1 NC 11 11 Nc NC 11 11 uc 12 12 12 12 wc Unit Components Section 2 2 CPU Units with 20 I O Points CPM2C 20C DT C D Inputs IR 000 Outputs IR 010 B A Sinking CPM2C 20CLIDTC D Sourcing CPM2C 20CLIDT1C D NC 12 12 NC A B A B NC 11 11 NC OUT 00 1 1 NC OUT 00 1 1 NC NC 10 10 NC OUT 01 2 2 NC OUT 01 2 2 NC COM 9 9
51. A B 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 OUT 08 OUT 00 OUT 09 OUT 01 OUT 10 OUT 02 OUT 11 OUT 03 OUT 12 OUT 04 OUT 13 OUT 05 OUT 14 OUT 06 OUT 15 OUT 07 COM 24 V 24 V ov NC NG NC Ng A B 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1C OUT 08 OUT 09 OUT 10 OUT 11 OUT 12 OUT 13 OUT 14 OUT 15 COM 24 V NC NC Unit Components Section 2 2 Unit with 8 Input Points CPM2C 8EDC Unit with 16 Input Points CPM2C 16EDC Inputs word Inputs word B A NC NC NC NC NC NC COM COM IN 07 IN 15 IN 06 IN 14 IN 05 IN 13 IN 04 IN 12 IN 03 IN 11 IN 02 IN 10 IN 01 IN 09 IN 00 IN 08 Units with 8 Output Points 2 ie Outputs IR word n Sinking CPM2C 8ETC Sourcing CPM2C 8ET1C 61 Unit Components Section 2 2 Units with 16 Output Points 2 16 Outputs IR word n Sinking CPM2C 16ETC Sourcing CPM2C 16ET1C OUT 08 OUT 08 OUT 09 OUT 09 OUT 10 OUT 10 OUT 11 OUT 11 OUT 12 OUT 12 OUT 13 OUT 13 OUT 14 OUT 14 OUT 15 OUT 15 COM COM 24 V 24 V 0v NC NC NC NC 62 Unit Components Section 2 2 Expansion I O Units with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector Units with 24 I O Points 2 24
52. CPM2C 8EDM CPM2C 8ETM CPM2C 8ET1M CPM2C 16EDM CPM2C 16ETM CPM2C 16ET1M ul EX Eg 268 Appendix Dimensions CPM2C PA201 AC Power Supply Unit Be 52 65 76 8 Expansion Units CPM2C MAD11 Analog I O Unit EZ qe 269 Dimensions Appendix B CPM2C SRT21 CompoBus S I O Link Unit Adapter Units CPM2C CIF01 Peripheral RS 232C CPM2C CIF11 RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit Adapter Unit 90 270 Dimensions Appendix B CPM2C Units with Connectors Attached Units with Relay Outputs Units with Transistor Outputs Units with Transistor Outputs Using pressure connectors Using soldered connectors la 104 Units with Transistor Outputs and MIL Connectors Dimensions Weights 272 CPU Units Terminal Blocks Relay Outputs 10 I O points Model number CPM2C 10CDR D Appendix B Weight 200 g max CPM2C 10C1DR D 200 g max 20 0 points CPM2C 20CDR D 250 g max CPM2C 20C1DR D 250 g max Fujitsu compatible Connectors 10 I O points CPM2C 10CDTC D 200 g max CPM2C 10CD
53. IN 14 IN 13 IN 12 IN 11 IN 10 9 8 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 NC NC NC COM IN 07 IN 06 IN 05 IN 04 IN 03 IN 02 IN 01 IN 00 Sinking CPM2C 24EDTC OUT 00 OUT 01 OUT 02 OUT 04 OUT 03 OUT 05 OUT 06 OUT 07 COM 24V NC NC A B 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 Sourcing CPM2C 24EDT1C OUT 00 OUT 01 OUT 02 OUT 03 OUT 04 OUT 05 OUT 06 OUT 07 COM 24 V NC NC A B 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 y 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 59 Unit Components Section 2 2 Units with 32 I O Points CPM2C 32EDTL_IC Inputs IR word m Outputs IR word n NC NC NC COM IN 15 IN 14 IN 13 IN 12 IN 11 IN 10 IN 9 IN 8 60 B A 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 NC NC COM IN 07 IN 06 IN 05 IN 04 IN 03 IN 02 IN 01 IN 00 Sinking CPM2C 32EDTC OUT 00 OUT 01 OUT 02 OUT 04 OUT 03 OUT 05 OUT 06 OUT 07 COM 24N NC NC
54. LD 00000 In the RUN or MONITOR mode ON OFF status of the bit will be displayed Pressing the MONTR Key will change to the I O monitor display Bits can be force set or force reset from the I O monitor display in MONITOR or PRO GRAM mode Note The ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 4 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the program 00201READ ON AND 00001 00200READ OFF LD 00000 4 4 7 Entering or Editing Programs 166 This operation is used enter or edit programs It is possible in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM The same procedure is used to either input a program for the first time or to change a program that already exists In either case the current contents of Program Memory is overwritten Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 00002 1 2 3 The program shown in the following diagram will be entered to demonstrate this operation MOV 021 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Specify the address where the program will begin 3 Input the address where the program will begin and press the Down Arrow Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes C A A 00200READ JL J 4 Input the first instruction and operand LD 00200 LD 00002 5 Press the WRITE Key to write the instructio
55. Locations subject to a humidity below 10 or over 90 Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera ture e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to shock or vibration Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Be sure that the conditions at the installation site conform to the CPM2C s gen eral specifications Refer to 2 1 1 General Specifications for details Note Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation Locations near to power supply lines 3 2 2 Panel Cabinet Installation Consider PC operation maintenance and surrounding conditions when instal ling the CPM2C in a panel or cabinet Overheating The operating temperature range for the CPM2C is 0 to 55 C Be sure that there is adequate ventilation for cooling e Allow enough space for air circulation Do not install the CPM2C above equipment that generates a large amount of heat such as heaters transformers or large resistors Install a cooling fan or system when the ambient temperature exceeds 55 C Control panel Air vent 81 Installing the 2 Section 3 3 Orient the 2 as shown below
56. Me OA 17 18 9 19 20 90 road Expansion I O Unit with 8 Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 8ET1M Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 2 4 Outputs IR word n A cow awe g eo ed 7 8 21 08 Load 9 1091295 11 12 ED Load 13 15 hem o 17 ha iam 19 20 a t Load 125 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Expansion I O Unit with 16 Sinking Outputs CPM2C 16ETM Output capacity Max common capacity 00 to 07 300 mA 24 VDC 3 2 A common 08 to 15 100 mA e VDC Outputs IR word n 24V 24V 1 2 24 VDC COM 3 4 cOM 01L15 01 07 _Load 5 6 Load 01114 011 06 Load 7 8 Load 1 Load SUN 9 10 25 Load 01112 11 12 01 104 Ld 01011 0103 34 Load 13 14 E Load 7 Load 15 16 Load 1 01109 01 101 T Load 17 18 Load gt Load 91 08 19 20 Load Note Wire COM terminals 3 and 4 and 24 V terminals 1 and 2 even though they are connected internally Expansion I O Unit with 1
57. Variable 2 read data upper bytes Variable 11 read data lower bytes Variable 11 read data upper bytes Variable 12 read data lower bytes Variable 12 read data upper bytes Response Monitor Area Offset 0 This area contains the results of communications when communicating with the component to read variables 1 2 3 1 End Code 00 When the function s end code is 00 the response monitor area contains the response code Response code Meaning Indicates normal completion Unsupported command Command length too long Command length too short Area type error Starting address out of range error End address out of range error Number of elements doesn t match amount of data Response length too long Parameter error Operating error 2 End Code 00 When an error occurs and the function s end code is a value other than 00 the response monitor area contains the end code error code The value of FF in the first two digits indicates that an error occurred during transmis sion of the CompoWay F command Error code FF04 Address overflow FFOD Could not execute command 242 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Error code Meaning Parity error Framing error Overrun error BCC error Format error Numeric data error Sub address error Frame length error Response data BCC error
58. a Input the d Click OK project name b Set the PC model to CQM1 c Set the PC model to CQM1 3 The new project s ladder diagram will be displayed a ow el Ts 147 SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 4 1 Writing and Editing the The SYSMAC CPT Support Software can display programs in ladder diagram Ladder Program format or mnemonic format To switch the display editing format select View V from the menu bar Program editor P and then Ladder L or Mnemonic M OA A fe Se De titer Startup Modes The operating mode of the CPM2C when the power is turned ON depends upon the PC Setup settings and whether or not a Programming Console is connected PC Setup setting Operating mode Word Bits Seiting Programming Console Programming Console not connected connected DM 6600 08 to 15 Mode set on Programming RUN mode Console mode switch Startup mode is the same as the operating mode before power was interrupted Startup mode is determined by bits 00 to 07 00 to 07 PROGRAM mode MONITOR mode RUN mode Note 1 The default setting for DM 6600 bits 06 to 15 is 00 Hex i e to start with the mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch If a Programming Console is not connected to the peripheral connector on the CPU Unit the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode as soon as power is turned ON Be sure that adequa
59. is gu before the WRITE Key the operation will be cancelled and the 3 word monitor display will return without any changes in data memory CHG 4 4 19 Changing Timer Counter SV Inputting a New SV Constant 1 2 3 178 There are two operations that can be used to change the SV of a timer or counter They are possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only In MON ITOR mode the SV can be changed while the program is being executed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM The timer or counter SV can be changed either by inputting a new value or by incrementing or decrementing the current SV This operation can be used to input a new SV constant as well as to change an SV from a constant to a word address designation and vice versa The following examples show how to input a new SV constant and how to change the SV from a constant to an address 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Display the desired timer or counter zu 00201SRCH UB 3 Press the Down Arrow Key and then the CHG Key 00201DATA 001 0134 727 4 At this point a new SV constant be input or the SV constant can be changed to a word address designation a To input a new SV constant input the constant and press the WRITE 00201 TIM DATA 0124 toa oe address designation input the word address and press the WRITE Key emer oed AR B A WER
60. via Terminal Block 10 I O Points 20 I O Points 8 Output Points mum mms fal iu iu lj lj v e Unit Outputs 10 I O points 6 inputs 24 VDC 4 relay outputs CPM2C 10EDR 20 I O points 12 inputs 24 VDC 8 relay outputs CPM2C 20EDR 8 output points 8 relay outputs CPM2C 8ER 24 I O Points 8 Input Points 8 Output Points 16 Input Points 5 2 Unit Inputs Outputs 24 I O points 16 inputs 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 24EDTC 8 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 24EDT1C 32 I O points 16 inputs 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32EDTC 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1C 8 input points 8 inputs 24 VDC CPM2C 8EDC 16 input points 16 inputs 24 VDC CPM2C 16EDC 8 output points 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 8ETC 8 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 8ET1C 16 output points 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 16ETC 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 16ET1C 10 System Configurations Section 1 2 Units with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector 24 I O Points Expansion Units CPM2C MAD11 Analog Unit Analog I O Unit Unit 24 I O points 32 I O Points 16 inputs 24 VDC 8 Input or 8 Output Points 16 Input or Outputs 8 transistor outputs sinking 16 Output Points CPM2C 24EDTM 8 transistor outputs Sourcing
61. 0 8 V max ON delay OUT01000 and OUT01001 OUT01002 and up 20 us max 0 1 ms max OFF delay OUT01000 and OUT01001 40 us max 10 to 300 mA 0 1 ms max 0 5 to 10 mA OUT01002 and up 1 ms max 42 Z N Caution 1 fuse for each 2outputs cannot be replaced by user Note The following graph shows the maximum switching capacity Output current mA 100 300 40 Output 4 5 20 4 26 4 voltage V Do not apply voltage in excess of the maximum switching capacity to an output terminal It may result in damage to the product or fire Specifications Section 2 1 Specification Circuit configuration Sinking Outputs n Tm 3 o o Internal circuits Output LED 43 Specifications Section 2 1 2 1 4 AC Power Supply Unit Specifications Rating 24 VDC 600 mA Efficiency 75 min at rated output Input conditions Rated voltage 100 to 240 VAC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Allowable voltage range 85 to 264 VAC Current 100 04 200V 0 2 Leakage 100 V 0 5 mA max at rated output current 200 V 1 max at rated output Inrush current 100 V 15 A at 25 C cold start 200 V 30A at 25 cold start Output Output voltage accuracy 10 15 including input load and temperature fluctuations characteristics Minimum output current 30 mA Ripple noise voltage 296 p p max Input fluctuation 0 75 max Load fluctuation 496 max Temperat
62. 2 RS 232C Port Outputs the CPU Unit s RS 232C port interface Connects to an RS 232C interface on a computer PT Programmable Terminal etc Pin Assignments 5CTS 358 2979 7NC 3 RXD 6 NC 2TXD 1 NC 227 Unit Components and Functions Section 7 2 3 RS 422 RS 485 Switch SW1 Switches the RS 485 interface and sets RS CS controls for the RS 485 in terface The factory default settings RS 485 are shaded RS 422 Setting RS 485 Setting SW1 SW1 SW1 1 OFF ON 4 wire commu Setting not nications possible Setting not 2 wire commu possible nications SW1 3 OFF ON Setting not Data can be possible received at any time RS control Setting not enabled for possible CPU Unit Note Do not turn ON both SW1 3 and SW1 4 at the same time Doing so will destroy internal circuits When using 2 wire RS 485 communications turn OFF SW1 3 and turn ON SW1 4 4 CPU Unit Connector Connects to CPU Unit communications port Internal Configuration Diagram CPM2C CIF21 CPM2C CPU Unit Peripheral port 5 422 5 485 CMOS level to Interna CMOS level port RS 422 converter miere com Terminal block RS 232C port RS 232C RS 232C port D Sub connector Note Do not mount or remove connectors for the CPU Unit while power is supplied Normal communications may not be possible and devices may malfunction 5 DM Area Setting Switch SW2
63. 3 Terminating resistance switches SW4 te oll Note The CPM2C CIF21 can be used only with the CPM2C 1 2 3 1 RS 422 RS 485 Port 70 Unit Components Section 2 2 Connects CompoWay F general purpose communications components and SYSWAY Temperature Controllers and Digital Panel Meters RS 422 Pin Assignments RS 485 Pin Assignments Receive data input Transmit receive data I O Transmit data output Transmit receive data I O Max line length 500 m Max line length 500 m RS 422 Connection Example RS 485 Connection Example Communications Communications CPM2C CIF21 component CPM2C CIF21 component RDA SDA lee som Q Q Note Confirm polarity before connecting RS 422 485 lines Some devices require that SDA SDB or RDA RDB and the signal be reversed 2 RS 232C Port Connects to an RS 232C interface on a computer PT Programmable Ter minal etc Pin Assignments 5 CTS 950 4 RTS 8NC 3 RxD TNG 2 TxD 6 NC x 1NC 3 Terminating Resistance Switches SW4 Turn ON both SW4 1 and SW4 2 on both ends of the RS 422 RS 485 trans mission path These switches are set to OFF at the factory 2 SW4 NIIT Resistance Resistance connected not connected 4 RS 422 RS 485 Switch SW1 Switches the RS 485 interface and sets RS CS controls for the RS 485 in terface 71 Unit Components Status Section SW1 1 OFF ON
64. 3 2 Identifying Errors 222 x exe ed Rhe RU Baa a eR s 193 5 2 2 User defined Errors 222222223522 992 repe eR ree RR S 194 5 2 3 Non fatal eee eU 194 3 2 Fatal ErrOrS tp Ba SUAS AE oo Rie SNORE DAD TEL ER RES SI Es 195 5 2 5 Communications Errors 195 5 3 Programming Console Operation Errors 196 5 4 Programming Awe a bares UES AS ORE PORE IBeS IE 196 5 5 Troubleshooting Flowcharts 198 5 6 Maintenance Inspections 2 206 5 7 Battery Replacement 207 191 Initial System Checks Test Run Procedure Section 5 1 5 1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure 5 1 1 Initial System Checks Check the following items after setting up and wiring the CPM2C but before per forming a test run Item Points to check Power supply and Is the wiring correct connections Are the terminals securely tightened Are there any shorts between crimp terminals or wires Refer to 3 4 Wiring and Connections for details Connecting cables Are the cables all connected correctly and locked Refer to 3 4 Wiring and Connections for details Protective label Has the protective label been removed Note 1 Always clear memory before beg
65. 5 screws G79 OLILIC XW2E 20G5 IN16 Relay Terminals tee G7TC ID16 Fujitsu compatible connectors G7TC IA16 G79 C MIL connectors G79 O C Cables See note Fujitsu compatible connectors XW2Z Terminal Blocks XW2B 20G4 M3 screws XW2B 20G5 M3 5 screws XW2D 20G6 G79 MIL connectors 679 Cables Relay Terminals Fujitsu compatible connectors Relay Terminals G7OD OC16 G79 C G7TC OCO8 G7OD OC16 1 MIL connectors 6716 0616 G7OD SOC16 679 6716 0616 1 G7OD SOC16 1 amp 7 G7OD FOM16 G7OD FOM 16 1 Relay Terminals Cables Fujitsu compatible connectors G79 MIL connectors G79 O C 96 G7OA ZOC16 3 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 7 Connecting Input Devices Wire inputs to the CPM2C s CPU Unit and Expansion I O Units as shown in the following diagrams Note 1 Be sure to make connections to terminal blocks and connectors with the cor rect direction and polarity Output transistor fuses may burn out if power is supplied to circuits with the connector connected in reverse 2 When equipment must conform to the EC Directives Low voltage Direc tives use a power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation Units with Relay Outputs The following diagrams show the input configurations via T
66. 6602 to enable user settings to use expansion instructions It will not be possible to transfer the program if the function codes assigned to expansion instructions 18 instructions have been changed from their default settings A message to turn ON the DIP switch of the PC and execute again will be displayed Change the function code assignments to the CQM1 defaults shown in the following table before programming Function code Default CPM2C Assignments Default CQM1 Assignments There are four CPM2C instructions STUP SYNC TIML and TMHH that are not supported by the 1 and cannot be used If one of these instructions is used in the program an error will occur when the program is transferred from the PC to the computer The input word for the frequency for PWM must be between IR 000 and IR 049 or between IR 200 and IR 252 If aCQM1 instruction that is not supported by the CPM2C is used in the program an error will occur when the program is transferred from the computer to the PC 145 SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 4 1 Error Log PC Setup The error log cannot be displayed If data has been written to DM 6569 to DM 6599 however this data will be incorrectly displayed as the error log Do not use the information that is displayed Some of the CPM2C s PC Setup settings are different from those in the CQM1 so not all settings can be
67. CPU Unit side to RS 422 port on conversion connected device side CPM2C CIF11 RS 422 externally connected device insulated using DC DC converter or photocoupler Function Host Link peripheral bus or no protocol connections RS 232C port Signal Outputs signals from the CPU Unit s CMOS on conversion interface without conversion CPM2C CIF11 Function Host Link no protocol 1 1 Link or 1 1 NT Link connections 3 Terminating Resistance Switch Set this switch to ON only for double ended connection to a Host Link net work This switch is factory set to OFF Swi ON OFF 4 RS 485 Interface Switch Used to switch to the RS 485 interface and to enable or disable RS CS con trol when performing RS 485 communications SW2 SW2 1 OFF ON 4 wire com Setting not munications possible Setting not 2 wire com possible munications SW2 Factory setting 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 ON 4 OFF SANE d OFF ON Setting not Data can be possible received at any time RS control Setting not possible for possible CPU Unit Note Do not set both SW2 3 and SW2 4 to ON Doing so may result in damage to internal circuitry Set SW2 3 to OFF and SW2 4 to OFF when performing RS 485 2 wire communications 77 Unit Components Section 2 2 5 Connector Connects to the communications port on the CPU Unit RS 422 Interfac
68. Inserts or deletes instructions from the program Entering or editing programs Overwrites the contents of the current Program Memory to either input a program for the first time or to change a program that already exists Checking the program Checks for programming errors and displays the program address and error when errors are found Bit digit word monitor Monitors the status of up to 16 bits and words although only 3 can be shown on the display at one time Multiple address monitor Monitors the status of up to 6 bits and words simultaneously Differentiation monitor Monitors the up or down differentiation status of a particular bit Binary monitor Monitors the ON OFF status of any word s 16 bits 3 word monitor Monitors the status of three consecutive words Signed decimal monitor Converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexadecimal two s complement format to signed decimal for display Unsigned decimal monitor Converts hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned decimal for display 3 word data modification Changes the contents of one or more of the 3 consecutive words displayed in the 3 Word Monitor operation Changing timer counter SV 1 Changes the SV of a timer or counter Changing timer counter SV 2 Makes fine adjustment changes to the SV of the timer or counter Hexadecimal BCD data modification Changes the BCD or hexadeci
69. OFF Component communications speed normal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turn ON both SW4 1 SW4 2 if the Simple Communications Unit is at the end of the RS 422 RS 485 transmission path The factory default setting is OFF ter minating resistance disconnected for these switches The power must be turned OFF before changing the settings on SW4 1 SWA 2 Do not touch SW4 when the power is ON because static electricity may cause a malfunction Set the CPM2C CPU Unit s Communications Switch and PC Setup as follows when communicating at the default baud rate 9 600 bps between the Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit Using Standard Port Settings for the RS 232C Port Turn ON the CPU Units Communications Switch to use standard communica tions settings for the communications port When this switch is ON the standard settings are used for communications through the RS 232C port and peripheral port regardless of the PC Setup settings in DM 6645 through DM 6649 and DM 6650 through DM 6654 The peripheral port s Host Link node number must be set to 00 Operation will be disabled if any other value is set Using Customized Port Settings for the RS 232C Port Turn OFF the CPU Unit s Communications Switch to use allow customized com munications settings for the communications port Communications through the RS 232C port are governed by the PC Setup settings in DM 6645 through DM 6649 and communications
70. Output capacity Max common capacity 2 250 VAC or 24 VDC Outputs IR 010 01000 1 Load 2 COM e a pert gt EN 3 01001 EET i 4 COM i L r ES Er E 6 Load 731 7 COM Les ls Fo 110 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 CPU Units with 20 I O Points CPM2C 20C IDR D Output capacity Max common capacity 2 A 250 VAC or 24 VDC Outputs IR 010 1101000 01001 2 Load j m 2 4 01002 er r E 01003 rm COM er e L r 2 7 01004 4 rg 01005 4 g EM HI i 101 01006 11 01007 4 E 13 00M Hob e Expansion I O Unit with 10 I O Points CPM2C 10EDR Output capacity Max common capacity 2 250 or 24 VDC Outputs IR word n 1 Load 5 2 5 01 01 L 3 Load TE IS T 1 2 cde 5 0 0 Toad 1 6 poe Load COM 7 pets L 4 111
71. Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 20C IDTM D Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC Outputs IR 010 24 T coo 5 01007 Toa 7 8 01006 Dem 9 40 21095 aadi H1 21 094 H3 14 Load 15 16 2 Load 1 17 18 010001 19 20 01000 e CPU Units with 20 I O Points Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 20C IDT1M D Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC Outputs IR 010 1 2 24 VDC 3 4974 5 6 Load 7 3 01006 aa 9 10 795 tTa 11 qp 21004 T 2d m 01003 T 15 16 01002 E ae 01001 a 19 201 4190 Load 121 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 CPU Units with 32 Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 32CDTM D Output capacity Max common capacity OUTO01000 to OUT01007 3 2 A common 300 mA 24 VDC OUTO01100 to OUTO1107 300 mA 24 VDC Outputs IR 010 IR 011 24V 1 2 24V 24 VDC COM 3 1 01107 01007 01106 01006 Load 7 8 oad 1 21105 9 10 01005 01104 01004 t 1 Load 11
72. Relay Units with Transistor Outputs and a Outputs and a Connector Terminal Block Sinking outputs Sourcing outputs 10 I O points CPM2C 10CDR D CPM2C 10CDTC D CPM2C 10CDT1C D CPM2C 10C1DR D CPM2C 10C1DTC D CPM2C 10C1DT1C D 20 points CPM2C 20CDTC D CPM2C 20CDT1C D CPM2C 20C1DTC D CPM2C 20C1DT1C D Interpreting Lot Numbers Factor identification symbol Appears only on the side of the product Year Rightmost digit 2000 0 Month JAN to SEP 1 to 9 OCT to DEC Xto Z Day 1 to 31 29 Changes SW2 Section 1 7 Operating Previous CPU Units The following instructions apply to CPU Units with lot numbers of 31800 August 2000 or earlier The previous CPU Units do not detect a Programming Console connected to the peripheral port and SW2 of the DIP switch was used to set either Programming Console or Other device omaonCPM2C pa SW2 Communications Switch Peripheral port RS 232C port gt ON Programming Console According to PC Setup in connection DM 6645 to DM 6649 SW swe Connection other than to According to PC Setup in Programming Console DM 6645 to DM 6649 according to PC Setup in DM 6650 to DM 6654 Programming Console According to standard settings connection Connection other than to According to standard settings Programming Console according to standard settings The relationship
73. The PC will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF if the power supply voltage falls below 85 of the rated value Momentary Power Interruption A power interruption will not be detected and CPU Unit operation will continue if the power interruption lasts less than 2 ms A power interruption may or may not be detected for power interruptions some what longer than 2 ms When a power interruption is detected the CPU Unit will stop operating and all outputs will be turned OFF Automatic Reset Operation will restart automatically when the power supply voltage is restored to more than 85 of the rated voltage Timing Chart of Power OFF Operation The power interruption detection time is the time required for a power interrup tion to be detected after the power supply voltage drops below 8596 of the rated value 1 Minimum power interruption detection time Power interruptions that are shorter than 2 ms will not be detected Structure and Operation Section 1 3 2 Undetermined additional time Power interruptions only slightly longer than the minimum power interrup tion time may not be detected 85 of rated voltage Detection of power interruption 2 Additional i time 11 Minimum time o Program execution Executing Stopped 1 1 reset signal i lg og CPU Unit operation will Unit
74. Unit 0 write variable type area 0 to 7 Unit 1 Communications protocol 8 to 11 Unit 1 Command group 12to 15 Unit 1 Segment information 15 Starting address of Unit 1 read data area 0to 15 Starting address of Unit 1 write data area 0107 Unit 2 Communications protocol 8 to 11 Unit 2 Command group 12to 15 Unit 2 Segment information 0to15 Starting address of Unit 2 read data area 0to15 Starting address of Unit 2 write data area 0107 Unit 3 Communications protocol 8 to 11 Unit 3 Command group 12 15 Unit 3 Segment information 0to15 Starting address of Unit read data area 0to15 Starting address of Unit write data area 0to 15 Not used 255 Example Application Section 7 9 Unit 0 Read Variable Type Bit s Function Setting Area CompoWay F Number of read items Reserved Starting address of read data area Variable 1 type Variable 1 address Note Variable type 00 0 and variable address 0000 indicate the PV Unit 0 Write Variable Type Bit s Function Setting Area CompoWay F Number of write items Operation Command Starting address of write data area Variable 1 type Variable 1 address Note Variable type 00C1 and variable address 0003 indicate the target temperature Unit 0 Read Data Area Function Gompoway F Res
75. Units have 2 inputs that can be used as quick response inputs These inputs are shared with interrupt inputs and interrupt inputs in counter mode they can reliably read input signals with a signal width as short as 50 us The input time constant for all inputs can be set to 1 ms 2 ms 3 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms or 80 ms The effects of chattering and external noise can be reduced by increasing the input time constant The interval timer can be set between 0 5 and 319 968 ms and can be set to gen erate just one interrupt one shot mode or periodic interrupts scheduled inter rupt mode 2 Features and Functions Section 1 1 Calendar Clock In CPU Units with a built in clock the clock accuracy within 1 minute month can be read from the program to show the current year month day day of the week and time The clock can be set from a Programming Device such as a Program ming Console or the time can be adjusted by rounding up or down to the nearest minute Long term Timer TIML is a long term timer that accommodates set values up to 99 990 sec onds 27 hours 46 minutes 30 seconds When combined with the SECONDS TO HOURS conversion instruction HMS the long term timer provides an easy way to control equipment scheduling Greater Data Handling Capability with Expansion Units Analog I O Supported Up to 4 Analog I O Units can be mounted to the CPM2C For each Analog I O Unit mounted to the Unit 2 analog
76. a communications Check whether the communications settings in the components match error with a component See note the settings in the Simple Communications Unit Correct the settings if 1 necessary Normal operation will be restored when the cause of the communications error is corrected Noise can cause communications errors If noise is suspected use cables and wiring methods that will reduce noise in the communications lines Normal operation will be restored when the cause of the communications error is corrected Syntax error See note 2 A syntax error occurs when there is an error in the DM settings When a syntax error is detected error code 02 is written to the Simple Communications Unit Status word see page 236 and the DM word address is written to the Syntax Error DM Address word see page 236 To restore normal operation correct the setting in the indicated DM word and switch the Unit from RUN to Stop and then back to RUN again Refer to Simple Communications Unit Control on page 235 for details on the RUN Stop Digit Note 1 Details on communications errors can be found in the Response Monitor Area See Hesponse Monitor Area on page 242 for details on errors that oc cur while reading or page 244 for details on errors that occur while writing 2 Syntax errors are indicated in the Simple Communications Unit status word Refer to Simple Communications Unit Status on page 236 for details Example Appl
77. and light the ERR indicator after writing the Simple Communications Unit Status word Syntax error non fatal error When this error occurs the Simple Communications Unit will stop communications with the components and light the ERR indicator after writing the DM address where the error occurred in the Syntax Error DM Address word DM allocation error fatal error This error occurs when the Unit attempts to read or write a DM address that does not exist in the CPM2C After the error occurs the Simple Communications Unit will stop communications with the components and light the ERR indicator Check the range of the PC s DM area and keep DM allocation within that range 8to 11 Stop flag Operation will stop if an error occurs and this flag will turn OFF Digit 162 12 to 15 Error flag A value of 8 bit 15 ON indicates that a fatal error has occurred Digit 163 in the Simple Communications Unit No error 0 to 7 Unit Indicates the unit number of the last component with which the occurred Digits 160 number communications were completed The Unit read data from this component and transferred that data to the CPU Unit These digits contain 00 when the power is first turned ON and communications haven t been completed for any of the components These digits will also contain 00 in the following cases Bit 15 OFF 161 1 The number of connected components the Simple Communications Unit Contr
78. communications port peripheral port and RS 232C port Communications settings Use the settings in the PC Setup DM 6645 to DM 6649 If a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port however operation will be in the Programming Console mode Use the standard settings 1 start bit 7 data bits 2 stop bits even parity and 9 600 bps baud rate If a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port however operation will be in the Programming Console mode 9 Customize Switch The Customize Switch can be used to turn ON and OFF AR 0712 in CPU Unit memory AR 0712 will turn ON and OFF according to the status of SW2 regardless of the operating mode of the CPM2C as O OFF Turns OFF AR 0712 ON Turns ON AR 0712 10 Battery This battery backs up memory in CPU Units with an internal clock The bat tery is connected when the Unit is shipped Note A battery is not included in CPU Units without an internal clock but a 2 1 Battery can be purchased separately and connected to backup memory 11 Low Battery Detection Switch This switch enables or disables the detection of a low battery error When a battery is not connected disable low battery detection by sliding the switch back toward the battery Switch position Low battery detection Forward away from battery Error detection enabled Back toward battery Error detection disabled
79. desired program address and press the Down Arrow Key C A A ii 00200READ 2019 TIM 000 IMONTR 1000 1234 If the status of a bit is being monitored that bit s status can changed using the Force Set Reset operation Refer to 4 4 24 Force Set Reset for details If the status of a word is being monitored that word s value can be changed using the Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification operation Refer to 4 3 19 Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification 4 3 20 Binary Data Modification 4 3 21 Signed Decimal Data Modification and 4 3 22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification for details 4 Press the CLR Key to end monitoring 00200 CLR TIM 000 Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular bit 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the bit address of the desired bit and press the MONTR Key B SHIFT CONT MONTRI 00001 ON The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the pre vious or next bit The displayed bit s status can be changed using the Force Set Reset opera tion in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode Refer to 4 4 24 Force Set Reset for details 3 Press the CLR Key to end monitoring CLR 00000 CONT 00001 Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular word 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the word address of the desired word B
80. down the original status will return one cycle after the key is re leased 3 Press the SHIFT and SET Keys or SHIFT and RESET Keys to maintain the status of the bit after the key is released In this case the force set status is indicated by an S and the force reset status is indicated by an R To return the bit to its original status press the NOT Key or perform the Clear Force Set Reset operation Refer to 4 4 25 Clear Force Set Reset for de tails Forced status will also be cleared in the following cases a When the PC s operating mode is changed although the forced status will not be cleared when the mode is changed from PROGRAM to MON ITOR if SR 25211 is ON b When the PC stops because a fatal error occurred SET Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 c When the PC stops because of a power interruption d When the Clear Force Set Reset Operation is performed 4 4 25 Clear Force Set Reset This operation is used to restore the status of all bits which have been force set or reset It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Z N Caution Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Unit
81. follow the procedure below to retain the timer counter area and Program Memory addresses 000 through 122 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SET NOT and then the RESET Key to begin the operation 3 Press the CNT Key to remove the timer counter area from the data areas shown on the display Counter PVs will not be cleared 00000MEMORY CLR HR DM 4 Press 123 to specify 123 as the starting program address 00123MEMORY CLR 1H 2 13 1 HR DM CNT 163 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 5 Press the MONTR Key to clear the specified regions of memory 00000MEMORY CLR ENDHR DM 4 4 3 Reading Clearing Error Messages Key Sequence 1 2 3 This operation is used to display and clear error messages It is possible to dis play and clear non fatal errors and MESSAGE instruction messages in any mode but fatal errors can be cleared in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before inputting a new program any error messages recorded in memory should be cleared It is assumed here that the causes of any of the errors for which error messages appear have already been taken care of If the buzzer sounds when an attempt is made to clear an error message eliminate the cause of the error and then clear the error message Refer to Section 5 Test Runs and Error Processing for troubleshooting information Follow the procedure
82. group 4 is selected words with offsets 3 through 9 will be cleared to 0000 Response Monitor Area Offset 0 The structure of the response monitor area is the same whether SYSWAY or CompoWay F communications are used See Response Monitor Area on page 242 for details on the response monitor area Read Data 163 162 16 Read data lower byte Binary 2 s complement 0000 to FFFF Hex 163 162 16 Read data upper byte Binary 25 complement 0000 to FFFF Hex Each two word value read from the Digital Panel Meter has a value ranging from 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF and is 2 s complement signed binary data The words will contain 0000 0000 if a communications error occurred The following exam ple shows the contents of the read data area when a communications error oc curred while reading the display value in command group 1 Response Monitor Area Contains the error code Display value Contains 0000 0000 Status Contains 0000 Note The decimal point position has to be managed by the user since the Digital Panel Meter s decimal point position is not transferred in SYSWAY X format commu nications Status Offset 3 6 and 9 The read data area s 3 6 and 9 offset words contain the status when read ing the display value peak hold value or bottom hold value respectively Refer to the Digital Panel Meter s Operation Manual for details on the status values Write Data Area
83. in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation Not doing so may result in serious accidents e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits Operating Environment Precautions 4 NWARNING N WARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution e The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed As a coun termeasure for such errors external safety measures must be provided to en sure safety in the system The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors As a countermeasure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system elf the 24 VDC output service power supply of the Power Supply Unit 2 201 is overloaded or shorted the voltage may drop causing out puts to turn OFF External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system in such an event When handling the Memory Backup Battery never drop disassemble distort short circuit recharge heat to a temperature exceeding 100 C or throw into fire Otherwise the Battery may explode catch fire or leak fluid When transferring programs to other nodes or when making ch
84. is executed only one scan Some components write to EEPROM when this selection is made and if it is made each scan the service live of the EEPROM will be affected The following data will be written to a Digital Panel Meter when host link has been specified as the component communications protocol The starting address of the write data area is specified in the control data area Select any one of the 5 command groups to specify which SVs will be writ Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Note Note ten although 10 DM words will be allocated to the write data area regardless of the command group selected Command group 4 Response monitor area Written Written Written Written Written Operation command Written Written Comparison value HH Written Written Comparison value H Written Written Comparison value L Written Written Comparison value LL Written Written Response Monitor Area Offset 0 The structure of the response monitor area is the same whether host link or CompoWay F communications are used See Response Monitor Area on page 244 for details on the response monitor area Write Data 163 162 16 Write data lower byte Binary 2 s complement 0000 to FFFF Hex 163 162 16 Write data upper byte Binary 2 s complement 0000 to FFFF Hex Set the words of data to be written to the Digital Panel Met
85. leftmost on the display Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 In this case the differentiation status of LR 00 will be monitored L000000001H0000 OFF OFF OFF 2 To specify up differentiation monitoring press the SHIFT and then the Up Arrow Key The symbols U will appear L000000001H0000 U OFF OFF OFF Indicates waiting for the bit to turn ON To specify down differentiation monitoring press the SHIFT and then the Down Arrow Key The symbols D will appear L000000001H0000 SHIFT D OFF OFF OFF 3 The buzzer will sound when the specified bit goes from off to on for up dif ferentiation or from on to off for down differentiation L000000001H0000 ON OFF OFF Note The buzzer will not sound if it has been turned off 4 Press the CLR Key to end differentiation monitoring and return to the normal monitoring display L000000001H0000 OFF OFF OFF 4 4 14 Binary Monitor This operation is used to monitor the ON OFF status of any word s 16 bits It is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described in 4 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor The desired word should be leftmost on the display if 2 or more words are being monitored c010 Word monitor 0099 2 Press the SHIFT and then the MONTR Key to begin binary moni
86. lower rightmost two bytes of the SV Hex data that you want to write to the corresponding component Data is expressed in 2 s complement signed binary format n variable number 2xn 1 0000 to FFFF Store the upper leftmost two bytes of the SV Hex data that you want to write to the corresponding component Data is expressed in 2 s complement signed binary format n variable number If a communications error occurs the write operation that is in progress will be stopped and the next write operation will be executed The Write Command Bit will be reset to 0 The following example shows the results of the write operation when a commu nications error occurred while writing variable 2 Response Monitor Area Contains the error code Operation Command The operation command won t be executed e Variable 1 write data The SV will be written normally Variable 2 write data The SV won t be written e Remaining write items SVs won t be written Note 1 The decimal point position has to be managed by the user since the compo nent s decimal point position is not transferred in CompoWay F communica tions 2 BCD format is used with Digital Panel Meters For details refer to the manual for the model used Area Structure for SYSWAY Communications Read Data Area The following data will be read from a Temperature Controller when host link has Caen Controllers been specifie
87. meet the required safety standards for the PC EN61131 2 6 3 Conformance to EC Directives The CPM2C PCs comply with EC Directives To ensure that the machine or de vice in which the CPM2C PC is used complies with EC Directives the PC must be installed as follows EC Directives 1 2 3 1 The CPM2C PC must be installed within a control panel 2 Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power supplies used for the communications and power supplies 3 Basic insulation is provided between the commons of different polarities of the output relay for the CPM2C 20 R model with 20 relay output points When connecting devices that operate at voltages higher than 50 VAC and those that operate on DC power supplies to adjoining relay output terminals use different DC power supplies for output devices from those for input de vices and the CPM2C power supply 4 CPM2C PCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission Standard EN50081 2 Radiated emission characteristics 10 m regulations may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used other devices connected to the control panel wiring and other condi tions You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives 6 4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods Countermeasures The CPM2C PCs conform to the Common Emission Standards EN50081 2
88. of the EMC Directives However the noise generated when the PC is switched ON or OFF using the relay output may not satisfy these standards In such a case a noise filter must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermea sures must be provided external to the PC Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the devices on the load side wiring configuration of machines etc Following are examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise Refer to EN50081 2 for more details Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the PC included is less than 5 times per minute Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the PC included is 5 times or more per minute xvii Directives Countermeasure Examples When switching an inductive load connect a surge protector diodes etc in par allel with the load or contact as shown below Circuit Current AC DC CR method gt Inductive load Characteristic If the load is a relay or solenoid there is a time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is reset If the supply voltage is 24 to 48 V insert the surge protector in parallel with the load If the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V insert the surge protector between the contacts Required element The
89. of all syntax errors Check level 0 checks for type A B and C errors check level 1 for type A and B errors and check level 2 for type A errors only 2722 Message Meaning and appropriate response The program has been damaged creating a non existent function code Re enter the program CIRCUIT ERR The number of LD instructions LD or LD NOT does not match the number of logic block instructions OR LD or AND LD Check your program ERR OPERAND A constant entered for the instruction is not within defined values Change the constant so that it lies within the proper range NO END INSTR There is no END 01 in the program Write END 01 at the end of the program LOCN ERR An instruction is in the wrong place in the program Check instruction requirements and correct the program JME UNDEFD A JME 05 instruction is missing for a JMP 04 instruction Correct the jump number or insert the proper JME 05 instruction DUPL The same jump number or subroutine number has been used twice Correct the program so that the same number is only used once for each SBN UNDEFD An SBN 92 has not been programmed with the same subroutine number as an SBS 91 instruction in the program Correct the program STEP ERR STEP 08 with a section number and STEP 08 without a section number have been used incorrectly Check STEP 08 programming requirements and correct the program Pro
90. on the Low Battery Detection Switch Replace the battery See 5 7 Battery Replacement for details 5 2 4 Fatal Errors PC operation and program execution will stop and all outputs from the PC will be turned OFF when any of these errors have occurred CPM2C operation can t be restarted until the PC is turned OFF and then ON again or a Programming De vice is used to switch the PC to PROGRAM mode and clear the fatal error All CPU Unit indicators will be OFF for the power interruption error For all other fatal operating errors the POWER and ERR ALM indicators will be lit The RUN indicator will be OFF Message Meaning and appropriate response Power interruption Power has been interrupted for more than 10 ms 2 ms for DC power types no message Check power supply voltage and power lines Try to power up again MEMORY ERR AR 1308 ON There is a non existent bit or word address in the user program Check the program and correct errors AR 1309 ON An error has occurred in flash memory Replace the CPU Unit AR 1310 ON A checksum error has occurred in read only DM DM 6144 to DM 6599 Check and correct the settings in the read only DM area AR 1311 ON A checksum error has occurred in the PC Setup Initialize the PC Setup and input the settings again AR 1312 ON A checksum error has occurred in the program Check the program and correct any errors detected AR 1313 ON A checksum error has occurred in the expansion in
91. protector s components should have the following ratings Relay Output OUT CEM2C Surge protector 0 Relay Output Transistor Output Sinking OUT CPM2C Diode _ Relay Output Transistor Output Sourcing OUT CPM2C Diode _COM The diode should satisfy the following requirements Peak reverse breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage Average rectified current must be 1 A Inrush Current Considerations When switching a load with a high inrush current in the CPM2C relay output or transistor output model such as an incandescent lamp suppress the inrush cur rent as shown below Countermeasure 1 Countermeasure 2 OUT OUT R 78 owe Providing dark current of Providing a limiting resistor approx one third of the rated value through an incandescent lamp Fuse Insertion The CPM2C with transistor output may burn if the load is short circuited there fore insert a protective fuse in series to the load Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 9 RS 422 Port Connection When using the RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit CPM2C CIF11 in a Host Link connection 1 N wire the RS 422 port as shown below
92. response inputs Interval timer interrupts 1 Scheduled Interrupt Mode or Single Interrupt Mode High speed counter One high speed counter 20 kHz single phase or 5 kHz two phase linear count method Counter interrupt 1 set value comparison or set value range comparison Interrupt Inputs Counter mode 2 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs Shared by the external interrupt inputs and the quick response inputs Pulse output Two points with no acceleration deceleration 10 Hz to 10 kHz each and no direction control One point with trapezoid acceleration deceleration 10 Hz to 10 kHz and direction control Two points with variable duty ratio outputs Pulse outputs can be used with transistor outputs only they cannot be used with relay outputs Synchronized pulse control One point A pulse output can be created by combining the high speed counter with pulse outputs and multiplying the frequency of the input pulses from the high speed counter by a fixed factor This output is possible with transistor outputs only it cannot be used with relay outputs Quick response inputs 2 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs Shared by the external interrupt inputs and the interrupt inputs counter mode Min input pulse width 50 us max 35 Section 2 1 Specifications Input time constant ON response time OFF response time CPU Unit Specification 10 I O points relay transistor outp
93. set expansion instructions will be displayed and transfer will not be possible It will not be possible to transfer the program if the function codes assigned to expansion instructions have been changed from their default settings A mes sage to turn ON the DIP switch of the PC and execute again will be displayed Change the function code assignments to the CQM1 defaults shown in the fol lowing table before programming Function code Default CPM2C Assignments Default CQM1 Assignments If aCQM1 instruction that is not supported by the CPM2C is used in the program an error will occur when the program is transferred from the computer to the PC There are four CPM2C instructions STUP SYNC TIML and TMHH that are not supported by the CQM1 These instructions can be used by transferring the expansion instructions from the CPM2C to the SSS This pro cedure is outlined in the following 153 Using Programming Console Section 4 3 1 2 3 PC Setup 1 Select Transfer Instr from the Utility menu 2 Confirm the transfer by pressing Y when the confirmation pop up is dis played GNIS 1 Freak appari table ted dig is 3 The Utility menu will be displayed again when the transfer is completed Since some of the CPM2C s PC Setup settings are different from t
94. the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode If downloading is performed when the is running it will automatically switch to PROGRAM mode and operation will stop e Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the CPM1 EMUO1 V1 Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock e After downloading has been completed be sure to confirm the user program data and expansion instruction information Not doing so may result in faulty operation 210 Specifications and Nomenclature Section 6 2 e Before touching the EEPROM or the CPM1 EMU01 V1 first touch a grounded metallic object to discharge any static build up Not doing so may result in mal function or damage 6 2 Specifications and Nomenclature 6 2 1 Specifications Specifications Supported PCs 1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 CQM1 CQM1H Read Write memory areas User program 15 2 Kwords max Data memory DM 6144 to DM 6655 Read only DM and PC Setup Expansion instructions 18 instructions Connector Connector compatible with CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A SRM1 V2 and CQM1 PCs For CPM2C and CQM1H PCs connect via CS1W CN114 or CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable Communications setting 1 start bit 7 data bits even parity 2 stop bits 9 600 bps EEPROM See note 1 256 Kbit EEPROM ATMEL AT28C256 OMRON EEROM JD Current consumption 129 mA max Dimensions Main body not including cables or connectors 57 x 92 x 38 W x H
95. through the peripheral port are governed by the PC Setup settings in DM 6650 through DM 6654 Set DM 6650 to 0000 to specify standard host link communications through the peripheral port Word Setting DM 6650 0000 Use standard Host Link communications settings The peripheral port s host link node number must be set to 00 Operation will be disabled if any other value is set Set the CPM2C CPU Unit s Communications Switch and PC Setup as follows to communicate at 19 200 bps between the Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit Turn OFF the CPU Unit s Communications Switch to use allow customized com munications settings for the communications port Communications through the Preparation for Operation Section 7 3 RS 232C port are governed by the PC Setup settings in DM 6645 through DM 6649 and communications through the peripheral port are governed by the PC Setup settings in DM 6650 through DM 6654 Set DM 6650 and DM 6651 as follows Use communications settings in DM 6651 19 200 bps baud rate 1 start bit 7 data bits 2 stop bits and even parity Note The peripheral port s host link node number must be set to 00 Operation will be disabled if any other value is set 7 3 4 Component Settings Make the following settings on the components connected to the Simple Com munications Unit Refer to the component s manuals for details on these set tings Unit Number Set the component s
96. unit number between 0 and 31 Do not use a unit number that is already set on another component Communications Settings Set the same communications settings that were set for the Simple Communica tions Unit in 7 3 2 Switch Settings Enable Remote Communications Writing Specify Enable Communications Writing Remote for the setting mode If Disable Communications Writing Local is specified it won t be possible to change the component s SVs Terminating Resistance Terminating resistance must be set on the component at the end of the RS 422 RS 485 communications cable Turn on the termination resistance switch on the last component 233 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 7 4 Data Memory DM Allocation The following diagram shows the usage of the Unit s allocated DM words Shared area Individual Unit areas Control data area Read variable type area Read data area Write variable type area Write data area Read data area Write data area 7 4 1 Shared Area The shared area is used to set and monitor values shared by all of the Units components Structure of the Control The control data area contains 103 words that are used to control operation of Data Area the Simple Communications Unit and monitor the Unit s operating status Ensur
97. when an interrupt program is executed Normally the results of interrupt program execution are transferred to I O memory just after program execution during I O refreshing but IORF 97 can be used to refresh a specified range of I O words during execution of the inter rupt program The specified range of I O words will be refreshed when IORF 97 is executed The normal cycle time is extended by the time required for execution of the inter rupt program Refer to Section 7 PC Operations and Processing Time in the Programming Manual W353 for more details and precautions on the cycle time Overseeing processes Main program Cycle time refreshing RS 232C port servicing Peripheral port servicing Although IORF 97 can be used in interrupt subroutines you must be careful of the interval between IORF 97 executions If IORF 97 is executed too fre quently a fatal system error may occur FALS 9F stopping operation The inter val between executions of IORF 97 should be at least 1 3 ms total execution time of the interrupt subroutine IORF 97 can be executed in the program to refresh a specified range of I O words The specified words will be refreshed when IORF 97 is executed IORF 97 can be used to refresh from the main program or the interrupt pro gram Functions Listed by Usage Section 1 4 When IORF 97 is used the cycle time is extended by the time required to re fresh the s
98. when installing it Electrical Noise Power lines and high voltage equipment can cause electrical noise in the PC Do not install the CPM2C in a panel or cabinet with high voltage equipment Allow at least 200 mm between the 2 and nearby power lines 200 mm min 200 mm min Accessibility Ensure that the CPM2C can be accessed for normal operation and mainte nance Provide a clear path to the CPM2C for operation and maintenance High volt age equipment or power lines could be dangerous if they are in the way during routine operations The PC will be easiest to access if the panel or cabinet is installed about 1 to 1 6 m above the floor Separate the CPM2C by at least 100 mm from other devices Other device device ao 100 100 s fal fal fl id ul FFPEPIS jum fal fal lo all 3 3 Installing the CPM2C This section describes how to install the CPM2C and connect Expansion Units and Expansion Units Refer to Appendix B for diagrams showing the dimen sions of the Units 3 3 1 Connecting Units Up to 5 Expansion Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a CPM2C CPU Unit Use the following procedure when connecting an Expansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit 82 Installing the 2 Section 3 3 1 2 3 1 Remove the cover from the CPU Unit s or the la
99. x D Weight 200 g max not including EEPROM Note 1 The EEPROM must be purchased separately 2 For general specifications refer to the relevant PC manual 6 2 2 Nomenclature Peripheral Port Connector Lock Lever EEPROM Socket Lock Lever For mounting and removing EEPROM DOWNLOAD TO PLC Buiton Writes all EEPROM data ladder programs data memory etc to the PC UPLOAD DM Button GREENS CONNECT Reads PC user program and contents of Indicator DOWNLOAD to PLC Button DM 6144 to DM 6655 to EEPROM UPLOAD DM Button UPLOAD Button UPLOAD Button gt O UPLOAD DM UPLOAD Reads only PC user program to EEPROM Note The PLC in the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button indicates PCs Programmable Controllers 211 Handling Section 6 3 LED Indicator CONNECT ERR red Meaning green OFF OFF Not connected to PC power supply OFF ON OFF Connected to a recognized PC Blinking OFF Uploading downloading data ON Blinking Host link communications error retry by user OFF ON PC model and EEPROM data not compatible OFF Blinking One of the following errors has occurred An unrecognized PC is connected An EEPROM error EEPROM not present EEPROM defect or no program to download or checksum error 6 3 Handling 6 3 1 Mounting Removing EEPROM Z N Caution Do not mount or remove the EEPROM with the CPM1 EMU01 V1 connected to t
100. year lifetime at 25 C 20 day backup at 25 C Battery error detection Supported Same as CPM2C Communications in CPU Unit Peripheral port via communications port Programming Console automatically detected See note 2 Peripheral bus automatically detected Host Link with Slave initiated communications No protocol Programming Console auto detect Peripheral bus auto detect Host Link with Slave initiated communications No protocol Programming Console auto detect Peripheral bus auto detect Host Link 1 1 PC Link 1 1 NT Link RS 232C port via communications port Peripheral bus Set with Communications Switch Host Link No protocol 1 1 PC Link 1 1 NT Link Peripheral bus auto detect Host Link No protocol 1 1 PC Link 1 1 NT Link None Input time constant Note Can be set to 1 2 3 5 10 20 40 or 80 ms Default 10 ms Same as CPM2C Can be set to 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 or 128 ms Default 8 ms 1 An optional battery CPM2C BAT01 can be mounted to CPU Units without clocks 2 The setting of SW2 will affect the operating mode for all Units with lot num bers of 31800 31 August 2000 or earlier Refer to 1 7 Changes in SW2 for details 25 Comparison with the and 2 Section 1 5 Differences in Instruction Sets TXD 48 TRANSMIT RXD 47 RECEIVE SCL 66
101. 0 INOO 20 19 08 Sinking CPM2C 20CLIDTM D Sourcing CPM2C 20CLIDT1M D 01 18 17 IN 09 NC 1 2 24V NC 1 20V INO2 16 15 IN 10 NC 3 4 COM NC 3 4 COM 424 V 03 14 13 IN 11 NC 5 6 OUT 07 NC 5 6 OUT O7 04 12 11 NC 7 8 OUT 06 NC 7 8 OUT 06 05 10 9 NC 9 10 OUT 05 NC 9 10 OUT 05 06 8 7 NC NC 11 12 OUT 04 NC 11 12 OUT 04 07 6 5 NC NC 13 14 OUT 03 NC 13 14 OUT 03 COM 4 3 COM NC 15 16 OUTO2 NC 15 16 NC 2 1 NC NC 17 18 OUT 01 NC 17 18 OUT 01 NC 19 20 OUT 00 NC 19 20 OUT 00 Unit Components Section 2 2 CPU Units with 32 1 0 Points CPM2C 32CDT M D Inputs IR 000 IR 001 Outputs IR 010 IR 011 r INOO 20 19 IN 00 4 Sinking CPM2C 32CDTM D Sourcing CPM2C 32CDT1M D IN 01 18 17 IN 01 24V 1 2 24V ovl 1 2 0V IN 02 16 15 IN 02 3 4 COM 24 V 4 COM 24 V 1 03 14 13INO3 OUTO7 5 6 OUT 07 7 OUTO7 5 6 OUT 07 7 IN 04 12 11 IN 04 OUT 06 7 8 OUT 06 OUT 06 7 8 OUT 06 05 10 9 IN 05 OUT 05 9 10 OUT 05 ipo OUT 05 9 10 OUT 05 06 8 7 IN 06 OUT 04 11 12 OUT 04 OUT 04 11 12 OUT 04 L INO7 6 5 INO7 89 Gut og 13 14 OUT 03 te OUT 03
102. 0 I O Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 20C IDTC D Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 2 4 A common Outputs IR 010 B A He 24 VDC jo Qi iS 9 CPU Units with 20 I O Points Sourcing Outputs 2 20 1 0 Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 2 4 A common Outputs IR 010 A 01000 Hind e 2 Hin cem 5 J o co Sees 24 VDC ig E O O Ja ol il alo Section 3 4 Wiring Connections Note Note CPU Units with 32 1 0 Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 32CDTC D Output capacity Max common capacity OUTO01000 to OUT01007 3 2 A common 300 mA 24 VDC OUTO01100 to OUTO1107 100 mA 24 VDC Outputs IR 010 IRO11 01000 1 1 01100 Coad 2 2 019 loaga 279 3 3191192 rios 91003 4 4 0109 Toad 2994 5 5 919 mog 095 8 gl 995 01006 171 7101100 oy 01007 8 8 0107 5 ro fol com ius 24V tol lo 24 24 VDC UAR 12 12 Wire COM terminals A9 and B9 and 24 V terminals A10
103. 000 to DM 1021 programs that use the Error Log Area cannot be used in the CPM2C without editing the program to change the location of the Error Log Area The following table shows differences in the PC Setup Function RS 232C Port Servicing Time Setting DM 6616 bits 00 to 07 RS 232C Port Servicing Time Enable DM 6616 bits 08 to 15 Pulse Output 0 Coordinate System DM 6629 bits 00 to 03 Pulse Output 1 Coordinate System DM 6629 bits 04 to 07 RS 232C Communications Settings Selector DM 6645 bits 00 to 03 RS 232C Port CTS Control Settings DM 6645 bits 04 to 07 RS 232C Port Link Words for 1 1 PC Link DM 6645 bits 08 to 11 RS 232C Port Communications Mode DM 6645 bits 12 to 15 RS 232C Port Baud Rate DM 6646 bits 00 to 07 RS 232C Port Frame Format DM 6646 bits 08 to 15 RS 232C Port Transmission Delay DM 6647 RS 232C Port Host Link Node Number DM 6648 bits 00 to 07 RS 232C Port No protocol Start Code Enable DM 6648 bits 08 to 11 RS 232C Port No protocol End Code Enable DM 6648 bits 12 to 15 RS 232C Port No protocol Start Code Setting DM 6649 bits 00 to 07 RS 232C Port No protocol End Code Setting or Number of Bytes Received DM 6649 bits 08 to 15 Peripheral Port No protocol Start Code Enable DM 6653 bits 08 to 11 Peripheral Port No protocol End Code Enable DM 6653 bits 12 to 15 Peripheral Port No protoco
104. 01 H Locator plate For the 360 series connectors FCN 367T TO12 H Connector cover Not compatible with the closed end cover pressure jack Connecting Connectors Pressure Connectors 1 2 3 Thin slanted cover for 24 pin connector FCN 360C024 J2 With slotted screws for 24 pin connector Can be turned by hand FCN 360C024E With Phillips head screws for 24 pin connector FCN 360C024B With intermediate Phillips head screws for 24 pin connector 1 Align the connector and insert it into the Unit FCN 360C024C Use the following procedure when connecting a pressure connector 91 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 2 Use a flat blade screwdriver to tighten the connector s fastening screws Flat blade screwdriver Connecting Connectors Use the following procedure when connecting a soldered connector Soldered Connectors 1 2 3 1 Align the connector and insert it into the Unit Phillips screwdriver Assembling Soldered Use the following procedure when wiring and assembling a soldered connector Connectors OMRON C500 CE241 1 2 3 1 Slide heat shrink tubing over the power supply wires and solder the wires to the appropriate pins on the socket 5 Heat shrink tubing Power supply wires Connector
105. 010010 JL JILD 00005READ Mere NOP 000 2 Input the normally closed AND condition 002 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes AND 00005 eo Jon JU ano 00006READ WRITE Mere NOP 000 2 Inputting the One second Timer 187 Programming Example 3 Input the 1 second timer T001 B 00006 TIM 001 WRITE 00006 TIM DATA 0000 4 Input the SV for 001 0 010 1 0 s B A 00006 TIM DATA 0010 WRITE 00007READ NOP 000 3 Inputting the Two second Timer 1 2 3 The following key operations are used to input the 2 second timer 1 Input the normally open condition IR 20000 to A A A A 00007 LD 20000 WRITE 00008READ NOP 000 2 Input the normally closed AND condition 002 It isn t necessary to input zeroes BS 00008 AND NOT 002 WRITE 00009READ NOP 000 3 Input the 2 second timer 002 00009 002 WRITE 00009 TIM DATA 0000 4 Input the SV for 002 0 020 2 0 s 00009 TIM DATA 0020 00010READ NOP 000 WRITE 4 Inputting the 10 count Counter 1 2 3 ponada The following key operations are used to input the 10 count cou
106. 05 6 6 00 13 Load 01 06 7 7 001 14 Load H 01 707 8 8 001 15 9 9 COM mee ov 10 10 ov 24 VDC 11 11 12 12 Wire COM terminals A9 and B9 and 0 V terminals A10 and B10 even though they are connected internally 117 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 118 Expansion I O Unit with 8 Sinking Output Points CPM2C 8ETC Output capacity Max common capacity 2 4 A common Outputs IR word n 300 mA 24 VDC Expansion I O Unit with 8 Sourcing Output Points CPM2C 8ET1C Output capacity Max common capacity 2 4 A common 300 mA 24 VDC Outputs IR word n A 1 penc cepa La al e 01007 ee 24 VDC ov 10 10 01000 gt i B 1 4 8 9 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 Note Note Expansion I O Unit with 16 Sinking Output Points CPM2C 16ETC Output capacity Max common capacity 00 to 07 300 mA 24 VDC 3 2 A common 08 to 15 100 mA e VDC Outputs IR word n road 011100 gt 01008 59150 2 01009 Toag _ _o1 02 z oD Toad 01003 01011 FETU 01004 017112 Load 01005 6 6 01013 4 Load 01006 01014 Load o a tes
107. 1 Installation Site Conditions 81 3 2 2 Panel Cabinet Installation 81 3 3 Anstalling the 2 22550 dg bd br ecb Sobre Bee 82 3 3 Connecting Units srei s eee eis cx et er ke Caio Rie ae 82 3 3 2 CPM2C Installations ene wet ides eae hs wee eae NW 84 3 4 Wiring and Connections 1 85 3 4 1 General Precautions for Wiring 85 3 4 2 Power Supply 86 3 4 3 Using the AC Power Supply Unit 87 3 4 4 Removing and Wiring I O Terminal Blocks 89 3 4 5 Removing and Wiring I O Connectors 90 3 4 6 Using I O Terminals and Relay Terminals 96 3 47 Connecting Input Devices 97 3 4 8 Connecting Output Devices 110 3 429 5 422 Port Connection on ee ARR a SU oe es 133 3 4 10 Programming Device Connections 134 3 4 11 No Protocol Communications 138 3 4 12 OMRON PT Connections 139 3 4 13 One to one PC Link Connections
108. 1 RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit 75 2 2 9 AC Power Supply Unit 78 33 Specifications Section 2 1 2 1 Specifications 2 1 1 General Specifications CPU Units with 10 20 I O points CPU Units Expansion I O Units and with Expansion Units 32 I O points transistor outputs Relay outputs Transistor outputs Supply voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage 20 4 to 26 4 VDC range Power consumption CPM2C 10CLJDR L 4W CPM2C 10EDR CPM2C 10CLIDT CPM2C 20EDR CPM2C 10CLIDT CPM2C 8ER CPM2C 20CLIDR U 4W CPM2C 24EDTC CPM2C 20CLIDT CPM2C 24EDT1C CPM2C 20CLIDT CPM2C 32EDTC CPM2C 32CDT CPM2C 32EDT1C CPM2C 32CDT CPM2C 8EDC CPM2C 16EDC Note The above values for CPU Unit power consump CPM2C 8ETC tion include the power consumption for Program CPM2C 8ET1C ming Consoles and Communications Adapter CPM2C 16ETC Units CIF 2 16 CPM2C 24EDTM CPM2C 24EDT1M CPM2C 32EDTM CPM2C 32EDT1M CPM2C 8EDM CPM2C 16EDM CPM2C 8ETM CPM2C 8ET1M CPM2C 16ETM CPM2C 16ET1M CPM2C MAD11 2 5001 CPM2C TS101 CPM2C SRT21 CPM2C CIF21 d M e 22 955595595 ees ee eee Se Inrush current 25 A max Insulation 20 MO min at 500 VDC between insulated circuits resista
109. 12 01103 01003 Load 13 14 Load 01192 15 16 01002 01101 01001 Load _ 17 18 LLoad 7 211 19 20 01000 iad Note Wire COM terminals 3 and 4 and 24 V terminals 1 and 2 even though they are connected internally CPU Units with 32 I O Points Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 32CDT1M D Output capacity Max common capacity OUTO01000 to OUT01007 3 2 A common 300 mA 24 VDC OUTO01100 to OUTO1107 300 mA 24 VDC Outputs IR 010 IR 011 V V 2 24 VDC COM 3 4 e i 01107 01007 5 6 Load 01106 01006 Load 7 8 Load oad 01105 9 10 01005 Lu onos fi 121 01004 Ld 01009 2220 Load 13 14 Load t 01102 15 161 2192 vU L radi 2119 17 18 01001 21100 201 0190 T Note Wire COM terminals 3 and 4 and 0 V terminals 1 and 2 even though they are connected internally 122 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Expansion I O Unit with 24 I O Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 24EDTM Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 2 4 A common Outputs IR word n
110. 12 12321 _ CPU Unit Structure be ee ee IS 12 1 3 2 Modes ek e E p Geka ta Shay ee oe EEE 13 1 3 3 Operating Mode at 14 1 3 4 PC Operation at Startup be R9 o 14 1 3 5 Cyclic Operation and 16 1 4 Functions Listed by 1 19 1 5 Comparison with the CPMIA and CPM2A 21 1 6 Preparation for 1 28 1275 Changesin SW2 sente Sides Neb Ata aU OR E e oes ial a 29 2 Features Functions Section 1 1 1 1 2 Features and Functions 1 1 1 2 Features The communications port can be used simulta neously as two ports Peripheral and RS 232C The peripheral port supports Programming Devices Host Link and no protocol communications The RS 232C port supports Host Link no protocol serial 1 1 Link and 1 1 NT Link communications Basic Functions CPU Unit Variations Expansion I O Units Share Programming Devices The CPM2C PCs incorporate a variety of features in a compact Unit including synchronized pulse control interrupt inputs pulse outputs and a clock function The CPM2C CPU Unit is a stand alone Unit that can handle a broad range of machin
111. 13 14 OUT 03 4 3 COM OUT 02 15 16 OUT 02 OUT 02 15 16 OUT 02 2 1 NC OUT 01 17 18 OUT 01 OUT 01 17 18 OUT 01 QOUTO0 19 20 OUT 00 L OUT 00 19 20 OUT 00 55 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 2 2 Expansion I O Units Expansion I O Unit Components Front View Units with Relay Outputs via Units with Transistor Outputs via Units with Inputs or Transistor Outputs Terminal Block Fujitsu compatible Connector via Fujitsu compatible Connector 3 Input xa 3 Input indicators 7 4 Output indicators e N gt ee i indicator indicators 4 Output 5 indicators E or connector input 4 Output indicator 1 Input 1 Input 1 Input terminals ig 2 Output connector or terminals COnmector 2 Output connector or 2 Output terminals 2 Output connector Units with Transistor Outputs Units with Inputs or Transistor via MIL Connector Outputs via MIL Connector 3 Input indicators 3 Input 254 Output indicator indicators or 4 Output indicator 1 Input q 1 Input connector em 2 Output connector connector or 2 Output connector Side Units with Relay Units with Inputs or Transistor Units with Inputs or Outputs via Terminal Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Transistor Outputs via Block Connector MIL Connector __ 7 Locking lever 6
112. 14 to 1 5 AWG 28 to AWG 16 Strip 7 mm Stranded wire 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG 28 to AWG 16 Strip 7 mm See notes Pin terminal 0 25 to 1 5 mm2 7 mm terminal length Recommended pin terminals Phoenix Al0 25 8Y Applicable wire size 0 2 to 0 25 mm Phoenix Al0 34 8TQ Applicable wire size 0 25 to 0 34 mm Phoenix Al0 5 8WH Applicable wire size 0 34 to 0 50 mm Phoenix AI TWIN2x0 5 8WH Applicable wire size 2x0 50 mm Note 1 When using stranded wire be sure to avoid stray wire strands that might short circuit an adjacent terminal 2 Do not solder the ends of stranded wires Solder can break and cause wiring problems Also the solder can cause corrosion on the contact surface Removing and Wiring a Use the following procedure when wiring a terminal block Terminal Block 1 2 3 1 Loosen the screws at the top and bottom of the terminal block as shown in the following diagram 89 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 2 Pull the terminal block out of the Unit ical E Ca m 3 Insert each lead wire into the terminal block and tighten that terminal s Screw 4 After wiring the terminal block insert the block into the Unit and tighten the screws at the top and bottom of the terminal block a Lf Note CPM2C 20 R Units do not have terminal block screws 3 4 5 Removing and Wiring I O Connectors Fujitsu compatible Connect
113. 17 to AR 21 AR 17 to AR 21 Analog I O Analog Units can be connected Same as CPM2C Same as CPM2C Temperature monitoring The CPU Unit can receive temperature sensor input from either thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers Same as CPM2C Same as CPM2C CompoBus S communications A CompoBus S Link Unit can be connected to provide CompoBus S Slave functions Same as CPM2C Same as CPM2C Communications switch Note This switch determines whether communications are governed by the standard settings or PC Setup settings Also sets the Programming Device connection See note This switch determines whether communications are governed by the standard settings or PC Setup settings The setting of SW2 will affect the operating mode for all Units with lot numbers of 31800 31 August 2000 or earlier Refer to 1 7 Changes in SW2 for details 24 Comparison with the CPM1A and 2 Battery CPU Unit with clock Internal lithium battery backup CPU Unit without clock Capacitor backup or optional lithium battery backup Lithium Section 1 5 None capacitor backup only Battery replacement Possible Possible Life expectancy backup time CPU Unit with clock 2 year lifetime at 25 C CPU Unit without clock capacitor 10 day backup at 25 C CPU Unit without clock lithium battery 5 year lifetime at 25 C 5
114. 1DTC D 200 g max CPM2C 10CDT1C D 200 g max CPM2C 10C1DT1C D 200 g max CPM2C 20CDTC D 200 g max CPM2C 20C1DTC D 200 g max CPM2C 20CDT1C D 200 g max CPM2C 20C1DT1C D 200 g max 32 points CPM2C 32CDTC D 200 g max CPM2C 32CDT1C D 200 g max MIL Connectors 10 I O points CPM2C 10CDTM D 200 g max CPM2C 10C1DTM D 200 g max CPM2C 10CDT1M D 200 g max CPM2C 10C1DT1M D 200 g max CPM2C 20CDTM D 200 g max CPM2C 20C1DTM D 200 g max CPM2C 20CDT1M D 200 g max CPM2C 20C1DT1M D 200 g max CPM2C 32CDTM D 200 g max CPM2C 32CDT1M D 200 g max Dimensions Expansion Terminal 10 I O Units Blocks points Model number CPM2C 10EDR Appendix B Weight 200 g max Relay 20 0 Outputs points CPM2C 20EDR 200 g max 8 output points CPM2C 8ER 200 g max Fujitsu 24110 compatible points CPM2C 24EDTC 200 g max CPM2C 24EDT1C 200 g max C t onnectors 5 points CPM2C 32EDTC 200 g max CPM2C 32EDT1C 200 g max 8 input points CPM2C 8EDC 150 g max 16 input points CPM2C 16EDC 150 g max 8 output points CPM2C 8ETC 150 g max CPM2C 8ET1C 150 g max 16 output points CPM2C 16ETC 150 g max CPM2C 16ET1C 150 g max MIL 24 I O Connectors point
115. 25 7 3 Preparation for 230 7 4 Data Memory DM Allocation 4 234 7 5 DM Settings and Component Communications 250 7 6 Precautions for Component Communications 251 T5 Error Processi a tae Se 252 7 8 Data Refresh Intervals Reference 253 7 9 Example Application essa o ape epe eg RR pre 254 Appendices A Standard Models 5 ocseccperepeie ru e TRO E P Av take eee EN 261 B Dimensions vec ote xe Dre Ue oer e e ont red uere os e CUR 267 C DM Settings Assignment Sheets 275 209 Revision 289 About this Manual The CPM2C is a compact high speed Programmable Controller PC designed for control operations in systems requiring from 10 to 120 I O points per PC There are two manuals describing the setup and operation of the CPM2C The CPM2C Operation Manual this manual and the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 V2 Programming Manual W353 The CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C SRM V2 Programming Manual is referred to as simply the Programming Manual in this manual This manual describes the syste
116. 292 1 Peak reverse breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage 2 Average rectified current must be 1 A 3 4 8 Connecting Output Devices Wire the outputs to the CPM2C s CPU Unit and Expansion I O Unit as shown in the following diagrams Don t exceed the output capacity or the maximum common current shown in the following table NWARNING The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposits on or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents Units with Relay Outputs via Terminal Block Note 1 Be sure to make connections to terminal blocks and connectors with the cor rect direction and polarity Output transistor fuses may burn out if power is supplied to I O circuits with the I O connector connected in reverse 2 Basic insulation is provided between the commons of different polarities of the output relay for the CPM2C 20 R model with 20 relay output points Therefore to conform to EC Directives Low Voltage Directive when con necting devices that operate at voltages higher than 50 VAC and those that operate on DC power supplies to adjoining relay output terminals use differ ent DC power supplies for output devices from those for input devices and the CPM2C power supply CPU Units with 10 I O Points CPM2C 10C IDR D
117. 2C 24EDTM 8 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 24EDT1M 32 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32EDTM 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1M 8 input points 8 points 24 VDC CPM2C 8EDM 16 input points 16 points 24 VDC CPM2C 16EDM 8 output points 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 8ETM 8 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 8ET1M 16 outputs points C500 CE241 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 16ETM 16 transistor outputs Sourcing 24 pin soldered connector with cover CPM2C 16ET1M C500 CE242 24 pin crimp connector with cover 262 C500 CE243 24 pin pressure connector Standard Models Appendix A Expansion Units Analog I O Unit _ S ene eit Analog Unit CPM2C MAD11 2 analog inputs 1 analog output Name Specifications Temperature Sensor 2 thermocouple inputs Unit CPM2C TS001 CPM2C TS101 2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs CompoBus S I O Link Unit Allocates CPM2C I O 8 inputs and 8 outputs when CPM2C used as CompoBus Slave Specifications Simple Up to 32 communications components supporting Communications the CompoWay F protocol and temperature Unit controllers and Digital Panel Meters supporting the SYSWAY protocol can be connected AC Power Supply Unit AC Power Supply Input 100 to 240 VAC Unit O
118. 6 Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 16ET1M Output capacity Max common capacity 00 to 07 300 mA 24 VDC 3 2 A common 08 to 15 100 mA a VDC Outputs IR word n ov 1 2 ov 24 3 4 COM 4 4 d 5 6 Load 011114 7 8 011106 Lu am 101 2105 Ld a E mU E mu 13 14 Load 1 rrzag 21010 1 16 01102 _ Load 18 011101 Load 9008 01000 Note Wire COM terminals 3 and 4 and 0 V terminals 1 and 2 even though they are connected internally 126 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Wiring Output Terminals The wiring for output terminals is as shown below Terminal Blocks XW2B 20G4 XW2B 20G5 Connecting Cable XW2Z A Sinking transistor outputs Sourcing transistor outputs 4 A 5 Terminal Blocks XW2B 20G4 XW2B 20G5 Connecting Cable G79 1C G79 O Sinking outputs Sourcing outputs 20 01 00 08 D De 0 01 01
119. 8 19 20 01 00 Load Note Wire COM terminals 3 and 4 and 24 V terminals 1 and 2 even though they are connected internally Expansion I O Unit with 32 I O Points Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 32EDT1M Output capacity Max common capacity 00 to 07 300 mA 24 VDC 3 2 A common 08 to 15 100 mA e VDC Outputs IR word n oV 1 2 ov COM 3 4 mias l 9 01015 A 011107 01014 7 8 01006 l Load 01013 9 10 01005 Load 4 rge 144 121 0 4 1 01011 13 Pr 01003 011110 15 16 011102 Load E 7 01008 19 20 01000 Load Note Wire COM terminals 3 and 4 and 0 V terminals 1 and 2 even though they are connected internally 124 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 Expansion I O Unit with 8 Sinking Outputs CPM2C 8ETM Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 2 4 A common Outputs IR word n 24V 1 2 COM 24 VDC 3 4 1 5 6 Load 01006 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 e Load 1 0 13 14 Load 1 15
120. 8 ON errors and clear the error Check the error indicated by Yes the flag that is ON correct set Yes AR 1310 to Turned ON during 2 See ONT startup tings as required and write data to the flash memory No No Check the external environment End 205 Maintenance Inspections Section 5 6 5 6 Maintenance Inspections In order for your SYSMAC system to operate in optimum condition be sure to carry out daily or periodical inspections Inspection Items Inspection items Power supply The main system components of a SYSMAC system are semiconductors and it contains few components with limited lifetimes Poor environmental conditions however can lead to deterioration of the electrical components making regular maintenance necessary The standard period for maintenance checks is 6 months to 1 year but more fre quent checks are required if the PC is operated in more demanding conditions If the criteria are not met adjust to within the specified ranges Details Determine whether the voltage fluctuation at the power supply terminals is within specifications Criteria Within the voltage variation range see note Remarks Tester Environmental conditions Is the ambient temperature inside the panel appropriate 0 to 55 C Thermometer Is the ambient humidity inside the panel appropriate 10 to 90 RH with no condensation Hygrometer Has dirt or dust col
121. 92 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 2 After soldering all of the pins slide the heat shrink tubing over the soldered power supply pins and shrink the tubing by heating it with a heat gun Heat shrink tubing 3 Assemble the socket and connector as shown in the following diagram T Small screws 3 Connector cover Small screws 2 Cable clamp MIL Connectors The following tables provide specifications of compatible I O connectors connector Compatible MIL Connector Specifications OMRON MIL Flat Cable Connectors Strain Relief Socket Set Socket XG4M 2030 Strain Relief XG4T 2004 Set model number XG4M 2030 T Recommended Flat Cable XY3A 200 Note The rated current for the flat cable is 1 A max Do not allow the common terminal current to exceed 1 A Crimp Tools OMRON Crimp Tool XY2B 0002 Attachment XY2B 1007 93 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 MIL Loose wire Pressure fitted Connectors Hood Cover Semi cover Socket AWG24 XG5M 2032 N AWG26 to AWG28 XG5M 2035 N Hood Cover XG5S 2012 Semi cover XG5S 1001 Two required for each Socket Pressure Fitting Tools OMRON Pressure Fitting Tool Set Handiplex XY2B 2104 Simple Pressure Fitting Tool XY2B 7006 Connecting and Use the following procedure to connect and disconnect MIL I O connectors Disconnecting MIL I O Connectors 2 3 1 Open the lock lev
122. AR area and counter values are backed up CPU Unit with clock battery 2 year lifetime at 25 C CPU Unit without clock capacitor 10 day backup at 25 C CPU Unit without clock lithium battery 5 year lifetime at 25 C Self diagnostic functions CPU Unit failure watchdog timer I O bus error battery error and memory failure Program checks Note No END instruction programming errors checked when operation is started 1 The DM area HR area AR area and counter values are backed up If the backup battery or capacitor is discharged the contents of these areas will be lost and the data values will revert to the defaults 2 The contents of the program area read only DM area DM 6144 to DM 6599 and PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 are stored in flash memory The contents of these areas will be read from flash memory the next time the power is turned ON even if the backup battery or capacitor is discharged When data has been changed in any of these areas write the new values to flash memory by switching the CPM2C to MONITOR or RUN mode or by turning the power OFF and then ON again 2 1 3 Specifications CPU Unit Input Specifications Input voltage All Inputs Specification Units with 20 pts Units with 10 pts 24 VDC 10 5 Units with 32 pts Input impedance 00000 to 00001 2 7 00002 to 00004 3 9 00002 to 00006
123. C 00000 Pulse input 00001 Direction input Sensor or Switch A leakage current can cause false inputs when using 2 wire sensors proximity switches or photoelectric switches or limit switches with LEDs False inputs won t occur if the leakage current is less than 1 0 mA If the leakage current exceeds these values insert a bleeder resistor in the circuit to reduce the input impedance as shown in the following diagram Input power supply 2 wire sensor etc 1 Device s leakage current mA Lc CPM2C s input impedance R Bleeder resistance CPM2C s input current mA W Bleeder resistor s power rating W CPM2C s OFF voltage V 5 0 V Le x 5 0 pe 2 50 R W min The equations above were derived from the following equations Input voltage 24 Input current Ic Input voltage 24 Input current lc OFF voltage Ec 5 0 Input voltage 24 R Refer to 2 1 3 I O Specifications for details on the values Lc Ic and The input impedance input current and OFF voltage may vary depending on the input being used INO0000 through 00002 have different values Input voltage 24 x tolerance 4 109 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Inductive Loads When connecting an inductive load to an input connect a diode in parallel with the load The diode should satisfy the following requirements 122
124. CPU Unit input bits can be used as high speed counter inputs The maximum count frequency is 5 kHz in differential phase mode and 20 kHz in the other modes Function Differential phase mode A phase pulse input Pulse plus direction input mode Pulse input Up down input mode Increment pulse input Increment mode Increment pulse input B phase pulse input Direction input Decrement pulse input Normal input Z phase pulse input or hardware reset input 00002 can be used as a normal input when it is not used as a high speed counter input The minimum pulse widths for inputs 00000 A phase input and 00001 B phase input are as follows Pulse plus direction input mode Up down input Differential phase mode mode Increment mode 100 us min p 9096 Phase A 4 50 c 1096 BAN a 90 12 5us 12 5 us Phase B jupe ie pk min min The minimum pulse width for input 00002 Z phase input is as follows 50 us min ON Phase Z FF Interrupt Inputs CPM2C PCs are equipped with inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs inter rupt input mode or counter mode and quick response inputs The minimum pulse width for these inputs is 50 us In CPU Units with 10 I O points inputs 00003 and 00004 can be used as interrupt inputs In CPU Units with 20 32 I O points inputs INO0003 through
125. Cat No W356 E1 3 Programmable Controller 2 Programmable Controller Operation Manual Revised November 2000 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property NDANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Z N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Z N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any thing else Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manu
126. Communications Unit and the CPU Unit components Remove the cover on the side of the Unit to access SW3 Setting Baud rate with CPU Unit 9 600 bps 19 200 bps See note 2 Baud rate with Normal 9 600 bps 19 200 bps components High speed 38 400 bps 57 600 bps Data length with components 7 bits 8 bits Parity 1 setting with components Yes None Parity 2 setting with components Even Stop bits with components 2 Not used Always leave pin 7 OFF Leave OFF Component communications speed Normal High speed pins are turned OFF at the factory 229 Preparation for Operation Section 7 3 Note 1 All pins are set to OFF at the factory The default communications method is normal communications 2 The communications conditions with the CPU Unit are fixed to the fol lowing Data length 7 bits Parity Even Stop bits 2 8 Terminating Resistance Switches SW4 Turn ON both SW4 1 and SW4 2 if the Simple Communications Unit is at the end of the RS 422 RS 485 transmission path Remove the cover on the top of the Unit to access SW4 RENE sw4 EOD ON Terminating resistance connected OFF Terminating resistance disconnected Resistance Resistance connected not connected Note Both pins are set to OFF at the factory 7 3 Preparation for Operation This section describes the procedures to prepare for communications Unit connections I
127. Connections 173 or compatible CPM2C CN111 XW2Z 200S V XW2Z 500S V CS1W CN118 SECTION 2 Unit Components and Specifications This section describes the main components of the Units that go together to create a CPM2C PC and provides the technical specifications of the Units 2 1 ZSpecIlHcatlofls etre ro tea cael S Eo d et v iat ae AND A 34 2 1 1 General Specifications 34 2 1 2 Characteristics pr Ere Backs 34 2 1 3 lOSpecifications ssc sits cheese ee aoe ea eee SOS 36 2 1 4 AC Power Supply Unit Specifications 44 2 2 Unit Components os bee et eae eid ape ear ee ae S 45 2 2 1 CPU Unit Components 45 2 2 2 Expansion VO Units onn ber date rete hee 56 2 2 3 CPM2C MADII Analog I O Unit coes osseo canas nese eee 66 2 2 4 CPM2C TSOOI TS101 Temperature Sensor Units 67 2 2 5 2 5 21 CompoBus S I O Link 69 2 2 6 2 2 Simple Communications Unit 70 2 2 CPM2C CIFOI Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Unit 74 2 2 8 CPM2C CIF1
128. DC power supply Link Adapter B500 AL004 Use for personal computer RS 232C port to RS 422A conversion Can also be connected to a CPM2C RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit CPM2C CIF11 Use for CPM2C peripheral port to RS 422 conversion 265 Dimensions All dimensions are in millimeters CPU Units CPU Units with Relay Outputs CPU Units with Transistor Outputs and CPM2C JOCDR D CPM2C JOC1DR D Fujitsu compatible Connectors 2 ICDTC D CPM2C JOC1DTC D CDT1C D CPM2C OC1DT1C D 90 CPU Units with Transistor Outputs and MIL Connectors CPM2C CDTM D CPM2C JOC1DTM D 2 CPM2C OC1DT1M D 90 1 1 267 Dimensions Appendix B Expansion I O Units Units with Relay Outputs Units with Transistor Outputs and CPM2C 10EDR 8ER Fujitsu compatible Connectors CPM2C 24 32EDTC CPM2C 24 32EDT1C Units with Inputs or Outputs Only and Units with Transistor Outputs and Fujitsu compatible Connectors MIL Connectors CPM2C 24 32EDTM CPM2C 8EDC CPM2C 8ETC CPM2C 8ET1C CPM2C 24 32EDT1M CPM2C 16EDC CPM2C 16ETC CPM2C 16ET1C Units with Inputs or Outputs Only
129. DM Area Setting Switch Sets the starting word of the range DM Area words used to exchange data be SW2 tween the Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit Rotary switch settings 0 to F correspond to starting DM Area words DM 0000 to DM 1500 The starting word is set in 100 word steps The following table shows the factory default setting Setting Starting word in DM Area 0 DM 0000 Communications Switch Sets the baud rate for communications between the Simple Communications SW3 Unit and the CPU Unit as well as the baud rate and frame format for communica tions between the Simple Communications Unit and the components The baud rates and frame format set SW3 must match the settings in the CPU Unit and components 231 Preparation for Operation Section 7 3 Terminating Resistance Switches SW4 Caution 7 3 3 PC Settings Communicating at the Default Baud Rate Note Note Communicating at 19 200 bps 232 In general set only the baud rate with the CPU Unit and leave the frame format settings set to their defaults 1 start bit 7 data bits 2 stop bits and even parity The following table shows the factory default settings Default setting Function Baud rate with CPU Unit 9 600 bps Baud rate with components 9 600 bps Data length with components 7 bits Parity setting with components enabled Parity setting with components even Stop bits with components 2 bits Not used Leave
130. E 1 CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A and SRM1 V2 PCs so existing ladder program re Sources can be used effectively 2 Features and Functions Section 1 1 Built in Motor Control Capability Synchronized Pulse Control Transistor Outputs Only High speed Counters and Interrupts Easy Position Conirol with Pulse Outputs Transistor Outputs Only Synchronized pulse control provides an easy way to synchronize the operation of a peripheral piece of equipment with the main equipment The output pulse frequency can be controlled as some multiple of the input pulse frequency al lowing the speed of a peripheral piece of equipment such as a supply conveyor to be synchronized with the speed of the main piece of equipment Motor driver Motor Encoder nnn Pulses are output as a fixed multiple of the input frequency The CPM2C has a two kinds of high speed counter inputs The high speed counter input has a response frequency of 5 or 20 kHz and the interrupt inputs in counter mode have a response frequency of 2 kHz The single high speed counter can be used in any one of the four input modes differential phase mode 5 kHz pulse plus direction input mode 20 kHz up down pulse mode 20 kHz or increment mode 20 kHz Interrupts can be trig gered when the count matches a set value or falls within a specified range The interrupt inputs counter mode can be used for incrementing counters or decrementing counters 2 kHz
131. E 00201 TIM DATA Jo Jes Jmm oum o Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 Incrementing and Decrementing a Constant 1 2 3 This operation can be used to increment and decrement an SV constant It is possible only when the SV has been entered as a constant 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Display the desired timer or counter 00201SRCH e Je rin 3 Press the Down Arrow CHG and then the EXT Key 00201DATA U D eG 000 0123 0123 The constant on the left is the old SV and the constant on the right will be come the new SV constant in step 5 4 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to increment and decrement the con stant on the right In this case the SV is incremented once 00201DATA U D 000 0123 0124 5 Press the CLR Key twice to change the timer s SV to the new value 00201 TIM DATA CLR 0124 4 4 20 Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the BCD or hexadecimal value of a word being monitored using the procedure described in 4 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpecte
132. GRAM mode MONITOR mode RUN mode 1 The default setting for DM 6600 bits 06 to 15 is 00 Hex i e to start with the mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch If a Programming Console is not connected to the peripheral connector on the CPU Unit the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode as soon as power is turned ON Be sure that adequate precautions are taken to ensure safety 2 The setting of SW2 will affect the startup operating mode for all Units with lot numbers of 31800 August 2000 or earlier Refer to 1 7 Changes in SW2 for details 4 3 4 Preparation for Operation Z N Caution 1 2 3 This section describes the procedures required to begin Programming Console operation when using the Programming Console for the first time Always confirm that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode when turning ON the PC with a Programming Console connected unless another mode is desired for a specific purpose If the Programming Console is in RUN mode when PC power is turned ON any program in Program Memory will be executed possibly causing a PC controlled system to begin operation The following sequence of operations must be performed before beginning ini tial program input 1 Be sure that the PC is OFF 2 Connect the Programming Console to the CPU Unit s communications port peripheral port See 4 3 1 Connecting the Programming Console for details The CPU Unit s Communications Switch set
133. I O Unit 66 CompoBus S I O Link Unit 69 CPU Units 45 Expansion I O Units 56 Power Supply Unit 78 Temperature Sensor Units 67 conduit installation 86 connectors available models 262 dimensions 271 counters changing SV Programming Console 178 example of inputting 188 function comparison 21 2 function comparison 21 CPU Units available models 8 261 components 45 cyclic operation 16 dimensions 267 general specifications 34 input specifications 36 internal structure 12 cycle time displaying Programming Console 184 cyclic operation 16 D data modifying Programming Console 177 178 179 180 181 data link 5 140 date See clock decimal data with sign See signed decimal data decimal data without sign See unsigned decimal data dielectric strength 34 differentiated instructions entering 168 dimensions 267 DIN Track installation 84 displays 283 Index converting between hex and ASCII Programming Console 183 cycle time Programming Console 184 downloading programs 215 duct installation 85 E EC Directives precautions xvi EEPROM mounting removing 212 specifications 211 electrical noise preventing 82 85 ERR ALM indicator flashing 194 lit 195 errors communications 195 error processing 191 fatal 195 identifying 193 non fatal 194 programming 196 Programming Console operations 196 reading clearing messages P
134. M 6144 to DM 6599 Same as CPM2C Same as CPM2C PC Setup 56 words DM 6600 to DM 6655 Same as CPM2C Same as CPM2C Memory backup Program area read only DM area including PC Setup Flash memory backup Same as CPM2C Same as CPM2C Read write DM area HR area AR area and counters CPU Unit with clock Internal battery backup 2 year lifetime at 25 C replaceable CPU Unit without clock Capacitor backup 10 day backup at 25 C or optional battery backup 2 years at 25 C replaceable Internal battery backup 5 year lifetime at 25 C replaceable Capacitor backup 20 day backup at 25 C Interrupt inputs interrupt input mode 4 20 32 point CPU Unit 2 10 point CPU Unit Interrupt inputs counter mode Counter mode Incrementing counter Decrementing counter Same as CPM2C Decrementing counter Counter upper limit 2 kHz Same as CPM2C 1 kHz SR 244 to SR 247 Contains counter PV Same as 2 Contains counter PV 1 Method s to read counter PV Read SR 244 to SR 247 Execute PRV 62 Same as 2 Read SR 244 to SR 247 Counter PV 1 Method to change counter PV Execute INI 61 Same as 2 Not supported Interval timer 22 One shot mode Yes Same as 2 Same as CPM2C Scheduled interrupt mode Yes Same as CPM2C Same as C
135. NC 17 18 OUT 01 NC 17 18 OUT 01 NC 19 20 OUT 00 NC 19 20 OUT 00 65 Unit Components Section 2 2 Units with 16 Output Points 2 16 Outputs IR word n Sinking CPM2C 16ETM Sourcing CPM2C 16ET1M 24V 1 2 24 ov 1 2 0V 3 4 COM 24 4 COM 24 V OUT 15 5 6 OUT 07 OUT 15 5 6 OUT 07 OUT 14 7 8 OUT 06 OUT 14 7 8 OUT 06 OUT 13 9 10 OUT 05 OUT 13 9 10 OUT 05 OUT 12 11 12 OUT 04 OUT 12 11 12 04 OUT 11 13 14 OUT 03 OUT 11 13 14 OUT 03 OUT 10 15 16 OUT 02 OUT 10 15 16 OUT 02 OUT 09 17 18 OUT 01 OUT 09 17 18 OUT 01 OUT 08 19 20 OUT 00 OUT 08 19 20 OUT 00 2 2 3 CPM2C MAD 11 Analog I O Unit Front View Right Side wwe 5 Locking lever 3 Expansion connector input er 4 Expansion 2 DIP switch connector output 5 Locking lever 1 Analog I O terminals 1 2 3 1 Analog Terminals Connect the CPU Unit to analog input and analog output devices 66 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 DIP Switch Used to switch between voltage and current input and to perform average processing Average processing for analog input 0 a LLLI T OFF Average processing not performed ON Average processing performed d Average proce
136. ORD lt PROGRAM gt BZ Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch CLR 161 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 4 4 Programming Console Operations 4 4 1 Overview Clearing memory The following table lists the programming and monitoring operations that can be performed from a Programming Console Refer to the rest of this section for details on operational procedures Function Clears all or part of the Program Memory and any data areas that are not read only as well as the contents of the Programming Console s memory Reading clearing error messages Displays and clears error messages and displays MESSAGE instruction messages Buzzer operation Turns on and off the buzzer that sounds when Programming Console keys are pressed Assigning expansion instruction function codes Reads or changes the function codes assigned to expansion instructions Setting a program memory address Sets the specified program memory address when reading writing inserting and deleting programs Reading a program memory address Reads the contents of the Program Memory Displays the status of the currently displayed bit PROGRAM and MONITOR modes Instruction search Finds occurrences of the specified instruction in the program Bit operand search Finds occurrences of the specified operand bit in the program Inserting and deleting instructions
137. OUT 02 3 3 NC OUT 02 3 NC NC 8 8 INO7 OUT 04 4 4 NC OUT 03 4 4 NC NC 7 7 IN 06 OUT 03 5 5 NC OUT 04 5 5 NC NC 6 6 INOS OUT 05 6 6 NC OUT 05 6 6 NC NC 5 5 INO4 OUT 06 7 7 NC OUT 06 7 7 NC INTI 4 4 IN03 OUT 07 8 8 NC OUT 07 8 8 NC IN10 3 3 02 COM 9 9 24 9 9 NC 09 2 2 01 9 010 Nc 08 1 1 IN OO NC 11 11 Nc NC 11 12 121 uc NC 12 12 Nc 51 Unit Components Section 2 2 CPU Unit with 32 I O Points CPM2C 32CDTI C D Inputs IR 000 IR 001 Outputs IR 010 IR 011 B A Sinking CPM2C 32CDTC D Sourcing CPM2C 32CDT1C D NC 12 12 NC A B A B NC 11 111 NC OUTOO 1 1 OUT 00 OUT 00 1 1 OUT 004 NC 10 10 NC OUT 01 2 2 OUT 01 OUT 01 2 2 OUT 01 COM 9 9 R010 OUT 02 3 3 OUT 02 n ouro2 3 3 OUT 02 N07 8 8 1 07 4 OUT 04 4 4 OUT 04 OUT 03 4 4 OUT 7 5 5 ouro4 5 5 OUT 04 05 6 6 INOS OUT 05 6 6 OUT 05 OUT 05 6 6 OUT 05 001 1 04 5 5 04 OUT 06 7 7 OUT 06 OUT 06 7 7 OUT 06 4 4 N03 OUTO7 8 8 OUT 07 OUT 07 8 8 OUT 074 02 3 3 INo2
138. PM2C Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A Quick response inputs Setting the quick response function CPM2C CPM2A PC Setup Section 1 5 PC Setup and INT 89 Unmask interrupt input INT 89 Mask Not supported ignored Supported INT 89 Read mask Reads mask status Reads result of mask setting INT 89 Clear Not supported ignored Supported Minimum pulse width 50 us min 200 us min High speed counter Count mode Differential phase up down mode Pulse plus direction mode Up down pulse mode Increment mode Differential phase up down mode Increment mode Max counter frequency 5 kHz in differential phase up down mode 20 kHz in pulse plus direction mode up down pulse mode and increment mode 2 5 kHz in differential phase up down mode 5 kHz in increment mode Counter PV range 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 in differential phase up down mode pulse plus direction mode and up down pulse mode 0 to 16 777 215 in increment mode 32 768 to 32 767 in differential phase up down mode 0 to 65 535 in increment mode Check when registering target value match table Same direction same SV not possible Same direction same SV possible Method used to reference the target value match interrupt table Comparison of all values in the table regardless of order of appearance in table Comparison in order of appearance in
139. SG CHK OK MONTR 5 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial programming display program ad dress 00000 The new program can be written at this point 00000 CLR Caution Check the system thoroughly before starting or stopping the CPM2C to prevent any accidents that might occur when the program is first started 185 Programming Example Section 4 5 4 5 2 Example Program The following ladder program will be used to demonstrate how to write a pro gram with the Programming Console This program makes output IR 01000 flicker ON OFF one second ON one second OFF ten times after input 186 IR 00000 is turned ON Start input 00000 C000 00000 20000 20000 20000 T002 TIM 001 0010 20000 T002 TIM 002 0020 20000 T001 CNT 000 0010 Reset input 20000 T001 01000 00004 00007 Count input CP 00010 00014 00017 Self holding bit 1 second timer 2 second timer 10 count counter Flicker output 10 counts ON OFF The mnemonic list for the example program is shown in the following table The steps required to enter this program from a Programming Console are described in 4 5 3 Programming Procedures Address Instruction LD Programming example procedures in 4 5 3 Programming Procedures 1 Self holding bit OR AND NOT OUT LD 2 1 second timer AND NOT TIM LD 3 2 seco
140. Sets the starting word in the DM Area that is used to exchange data between the Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit The following table shows the relationship between the rotary switch setting and starting DM Area word 228 Unit Components and Functions Section 7 2 Setting Starting word in DM Area DM 0000 DM 0100 DM 0200 DM 0300 DM 0400 DM 0500 DM 0600 DM 0700 DM 0800 DM 0900 DM 1000 DM 1100 DM 1200 DM 1300 DM 1400 DM 1500 nlm oou ojo oio5o m i2 o 6 Status Indicators Indicate the operating status of the Simple Communications Unit Status Meaning Lit Communications established between Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit Simple Communications Unit operating Not lit Simple Communications Unit not operating Flashing Communications between Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit either not established or interrupted ERR ALM Lit Fatal error occurred Unit operation stops Flashing Non fatal error occurred Unit operation continues Not lit Unit operating normally Flashing Transferring data between Simple Communications Unit and CPU Unit Not lit Not transferring data Flashing Transferring data between Simple Communications Unit and connected components Not lit Not transferring data 7 Communications Switch SW3 Sets the baud rates and frame formats for communications between the Simple
141. TM D CPM2C 20C1DTM D 8 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 20CDT1M D CPM2C 20C1DT1M D 32 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32CDTM D 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32CDT1M D 261 Standard Models Expansion I O Units Classification and Appearance Units with Terminal Blocks capacity 10 I O points 6 points 24 VDC Outputs 4 relay outputs Appendix A CPM2C 10EDR 20 I O points 12 points 24 VDC 8 relay outputs CPM2C 20EDR 8 output points 8 relay outputs CPM2C 8ER Units with Fujitsu compatible 24 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 24EDTC 8 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 24EDT1C Connectors 32 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 32EDTC 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1C 8 input points 8 points 24 VDC CPM2C 8EDC 16 input points 16 points 24 VDC CPM2C 16EDC 8 output points 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 8ETC 8 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 8ET1C 16 output points 16 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 16ETC 16 transistor outputs Sourcing CPM2C 16ET1C Units with MIL Connectors 24 I O points 16 points 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM
142. Terminals Connector Connects the CPU Unit to external output devices 4 PC Status Indicators These indicators show the operating status of the PC as shown in the fol lowing table Indicator Status Meaning PWR ON Power is being supplied to the PC green OFF Power isn t being supplied to the PC RUN ON The PC is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode green OFF The PC is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal error has occurred COMM Flashing Data is being transferred via the communications yellow port peripheral or RS 232C OFF Data isn t being transferred via communications port ERR ALARM ON A fatal error has occurred PC operation stops red Flashing A non fatal error has occurred PC operation continues OFF Indicates normal operation Note CPU Units with lot numbers of 31800 or earlier produced 31 August 2000 or earlier also have a PRO green indicator that operates as follows The CPU Unit is set for Programming Console connection The CPU Unit is not set for Programming Console connection 5 Input Indicators The input indicators are lit when the corresponding input terminal is ON The status of an input indicator will reflect the status of the input even when that input is being used for a high speed counter Note a When interrupt inputs are used in interrupt input mode the indica tor may not light even when the interrupt condition is met if the put is not ON
143. The CPM2C program isn t executed in PROGRAM mode Use PROGRAM mode to create and edit the program clear memory or check the program for errors MONITOR Mode The CPM2C program is executed in MONITOR mode and I O is processed just as it is in RUN mode Use MONITOR mode to test system operations such as monitoring CPM2C operating status force setting and resetting bits chang ing the SV PV of timers and counters changing word data and online editing RUN Mode This is the CPM2C s normal operating mode The CPM2C s operating status can be monitored from a Programming Device but bits can t be force set force reset and the SV PV of timers and counters can t be changed Check the system thoroughly before changing the operating mode of the PC to prevent any accidents that might occur when the program is first started Never change the mode while pressing any of the keys 159 Using Programming Console Section 4 3 Startup Modes The operating mode of the CPM2C when the power is turned ON depends upon the PC Setup settings and whether or not a Programming Console is connected PC Setup setting Operating mode Word Bits Setting Programming Console Programming Console not connected connected DM 6600 08 to 15 Mode set on Programming RUN mode Note Console mode switch Startup mode is the same as the operating mode before power was interrupted Startup mode is determined by bits 00 to 07 00 to 07 PRO
144. The following data will be written to a Temperature Controller when SYSWAY ower Controllers has been specified as the component communications protocol words The starting address of the write data area is specified in the control data area Select any one of the 5 command groups to specify which SVs will be writ ten although 9 DM words will be allocated to the write data area regardless of the command group selected Offset Command group 2 3 4 Response monitor area Written Written Written Written Written Target temperature Written Written Written Written Written Operation command Written Written Written Written Alarm 1 SV Written Written Written 247 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Note Note Write Data Area Digital Panel Meters 10 words 248 Command group 3 4 Alarm 2 SV Written Written Written Proportional band Written Written Reset time Written Written Derivative time Written Written Heater burnout detection Written value Response Monitor Area Offset 0 The structure of the response monitor area is the same whether SYSWAY or CompoWay F communications are used See Response Monitor Area on page 244 for details on the response monitor area Write Data Offset 1 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 Set the words of data to be written to the Temperature Controller as 2 s comple men
145. UT 01 OUT 00 Sourcing CPM2C 32EDT1M 24 V OUT 15 OUT 14 OUT 13 OUT 12 OUT 11 OUT 10 OUT 09 OUT 08 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 COM 24 V OUT 07 OUT 06 OUT 05 OUT 04 OUT 03 OUT 02 OUT 01 OUT 00 Unit Components Section 2 2 Unit with 8 Input Points CPM2C 8EDM Unit with 16 Input Points CPM2C 16EDM Units with 8 Output Points 2 IN 08 09 10 11 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 COM NC Inputs IR word m Inputs IR word m INoo 20 19 NC 00 20 19 01 18 17 NC 01 18 17 02 16 15 NC 02 16 15 03 14 13 NC 03 14 13 No4 12 11 NC 04 12 Nos 10 9 NC Nos 10 9 8 7 NC 06 8 7 No7 3 NC No7 6 5 3 NC 4 3 NC 1 NC 2 1 Outputs IR word n Sinking CPM2C 8ETM Sourcing CPM2C 8ET1M NC 1 2 24 NC 1 2 0 Nc 3 4 3 4 COM 24 V NC 5 6 OUT 07 5 6 OUT 07 NC 7 8 OUT 06 NC 7 8 OUT 06 NC 9 10 OUT 05 NC 9 10 OUT 05 NC 11 12 OUT 04 NC 11 12 OUT 04 NC 13 14 OUT 03 NC 13 14 OUT 03 NC 15 16 OUT 02 NC 15 16 OUT 02
146. Unit 0 write variable type area Unit 1 communications type Starting address of Unit 1 read data area Starting address of Unit 1 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 1 write data area Starting address of Unit 1 write variable type area Unit 2 communications type Starting address of Unit 2 read data area Starting address of Unit 2 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 2 write data area Starting address of Unit 2 write variable type area Unit 3 communications type Starting address of Unit 3 read data area Starting address of Unit 3 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 3 write data area Starting address of Unit 3 write variable type area Unit 4 communications type Starting address of Unit 4 read data area Starting address of Unit 4 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 4 write data area Starting address of Unit 4 write variable type area Unit 5 communications type Starting address of Unit 5 read data area Starting address of Unit 5 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 5 write data area Starting address of Unit 5 write variable type area Unit 6 communications type Starting address of Unit 6 read data area Starting address of Unit 6 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 6 write data area Starting address of Unit 6 write variable type area Unit 7 communications type Starting address of Unit 7 read data area Starting address of Unit 7 read variable type area Sta
147. Unit and components The communications timeout setting can be set in multiples of 500 ms up to the maximum monitoring time of 5 0 s Set a monitoring time appropriate for your system 1 Under normal conditions it is not necessary to change the communications timeout setting In general use a setting of 0 which sets a response monitor ing time of 500 ms Refer to Simple Communications Unit Control on page 235 for details on the communications timeout setting 2 When selecting the RAM write mode or backup mode program the selec tion operation so that it is executed only one scan Some components write to EEPROM when this selection is made and if it is made each scan the service live of the EEPROM will be affected 251 Error Processing Section 7 7 7 7 7 7 1 Error Processing The Simple Communications Unit can detect two kinds of errors fatal errors cause the ERR indicator to light and non fatal errors cause the ERR indicator to flash The following tables show the likely causes of these errors and the error processing required Fatal Errors ERR Indicator Lit Communications cannot be Check the communications baud rate and other communications settings established with the CPU Unit in the CPU Unit and Simple Communications Unit Correct the settings and turn ON the Simple Communications Unit again There was a communications Noise can cause communications errors If noise is suspected use error with the CPU Unit cabl
148. W2 changed or add ed Page 23 Added note Page 30 Power consumption information expanded and dielectric strength changed Page 31 Interrupt processing and clock function information expanded Page 42 Switch functions revised Page 67 Revised information on crimp terminals Page 70 Added note and heading Pages 94 115 116 CQM1H PROO1 E added Page 97 Model numbers corrected in graphic Page 106 Windows versions corrected Page 126 Pressing the MONTR Key will change paragraph changed Page 133 In MONITOR or PROGRAM mode added in Bit Monitor descrip tion Page 190 Appendix C added 289
149. a Check the program 217 SECTION 7 Simple Communications Unit This section describes the features and functions of the CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit the settings required to use the Unit and an example application DM Settings Assignment Sheets are provided in Appendix C to record data settings 4 1 Introduction RR Cn 220 Tell JPeature8 gt elect 220 7 1 2 System Configuration cesse s e nds Rh cR ER 220 7 1 3 Processing Component Data 222 7 2 Unit Components and Functions 225 7 3 Preparation for Operation iss e s o e eode Ret dae als 230 7 3 1 nitConnections c l vp epe e Re RE Ree emus 230 7 3 2 Switch bt ete ederent xem es 231 7 323 Settings eee wees ot REEL Oo Ree qd READ SE SER PRX Id us 232 7 3 4 Component 233 7 4 Data Memory DM Allocation 1 234 TA Shared Area oren ere DAO SEAT had steeds 234 7 4 2 Individual Unit 240 7 5 DM Settings and Component Communications 1 250 7 5 1 CDM Settin gS obscene pia oda es 250 7 5 2 Star
150. abilities how to connect the Pro gramming Console and how to perform the various programming operations Section 5 describes how to perform a test run and how to diagnose and correct the hardware and soft ware errors that can occur during PC operation Section 6 describes how to use the CPM1 EMU01 V1 Expansion Memory Unit Section 7 describes the features and functions of the CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit the settings required to use the Unit and an example application DM Settings Assignment Sheets are pro vided in Appendix C to record data settings Appendix A provides tables of CPM2C Units and related products Appendix B provides the dimensions of CPM2C Units Appendix C provides DM setting assignment sheets for use with the CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communica tions Unit NNARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given ix This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller and related devices PRECAUTIONS The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Con troller You must read this section and understand the informat
151. acteristics 34 Expansion Memory Unit 211 general specifications 34 T O connectors 91 93 input specifications CPU Units 36 Expansion I O Units 39 output specifications relay output 40 transistor output 42 Power Supply Unit 44 terminal blocks 89 weights 272 SSS 151 status monitoring Programming Console 172 Support Software 144 SV modifying Programming Console 178 syntax checking the program Programming Console 172 SYSMAC Support Software See SSS SYSMAC CPT Support Software 144 precautions 144 system checks 192 configuration 8 I temperature operating storage 34 Temperature Sensor Units See also Expansion Units available models 263 components 67 dimensions 269 terminal blocks connections 96 specifications 89 wiring 89 test run example 190 procedure 192 thermocouple 4 time See clock timers changing SV Programming Console 178 example of inputting 188 troubleshooting 198 fatal errors 200 I O errors 202 non fatal errors 201 operating conditions 204 power supply 199 205 Index U W operating voltage range 34 output connections 107 unsigned decimal data supply voltage 34 modifying Programming Console 181 EA weight 272 monitoring 177 uploading programs 214 wiring 85 I O connectors 90 power supply 86 voltage terminal blocks 89 vibration resistance 34 287 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix
152. al to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc O OMRON 1999 rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permis sion of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa tion contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAU TIONS a2 dort e I ace xi Intended Audience REM ee I uU E xii 2 General Precautions b be D UR VUE SIUE C opal SERM xii 3 Salety Precautions rece expe ree VERA CRI e xii 4 Operating Environment Precautions xiii 5 Application Precautions xiv 6 EC Directives Oa OPERI
153. an analog input and output an analog output Analog I O Unit Connect the Analog I O Unit to the CPU Unit Receive temperature sensor input directly at the PC Temperature Sensor Unit Connect the Temperature Sensor Unit to the CPU Unit Reduce required wiring space and PC load by controlling equipment CompoBus S Link Unit with a few low capacity PCs dispersed near the equipment rather than Connect the CompoBus S Link a single large centralized PC Unit to the CPU Unit Create a remote I O link with a CompoBus S Master and CompoBus S Slaves Obtain data from SYSWAY compatible temperature controllers digital Simple Communications Unit Page panel meters or CompoWay F compatible general purpose Connect the Simple Communications 219 communications components Unit to the CPU Unit Basic Functions Set the cycle time to a fixed interval Function Set a minimum fixed cycle time in the PC Setup Stop PC operation when the cycle time exceeds a maximum setting Set a maximum watch cycle time in the PC Setup Keep all outputs ON when PC operation stops Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit SR 25212 Retain the contents of I O memory when starting operation Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit SR 25212 Retain the contents of I O memory when the is turned ON Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit SR 25212 and set the PC Setup DM 6601 so that the status of the Hold Bit is maintained at star
154. and the wires are not pinched or kinked when the battery is inserted 207 Battery Replacement Section 5 7 5 To enable the detection of low battery errors slide the Low Battery Detection Switch towards the front of the Unit and set bits 12 to 15 of DM 6655 to 0 Low Battery Detection Switch 6 Replace the battery cover 7 Write the next date that the battery should be replaced on the reminder label The battery lifetime of the CPU Unit with clock is 2 years at 25 C and that of the CPU Unit without clock is 5 years at 25 C 208 6 Expansion Memory Unit This section describes how to use the CPM1 EMUOI V 1 Expansion Memory Unit Follow the handling precautions and pro cedures to properly use the Unit 6 1 6 2 6 3 Overview vectes cui Se Dose coeds id 6 11 Memory Areas cse men ha writes es 6 1 2 Precautions uoc Saag had wished Specifications and Nomenclature 6 2 Specifications exe Oe ee e E 6 2 2 Nomenclature gt us e ex etc pb ree ea do Ree ac eo e CRUS US Handling ess eck RN SA O X ur ear Pea Mte bonas 6 3 1 Mounting Removing 6 3 2 Connections Rie qs RS ROAR EEE LEME Rad S IE Ns 6 3 3 Upl
155. and B10 even though they are connected internally CPU Units with 32 Points Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 32CDT1C D Output capacity Max common capacity OUTO01000 to OUT01007 3 2 A common 300 mA 24 VDC OUTO01100 to OUTO1107 100 mA 24 VDC Outputs IR 010 IRO11 A B Lad 01000 01100 Load 01001 5 2 01101 ead Load oe 3 3 2 oad t 01003 4 4 01103 n 01004 5 5 01104 01005 6 6 8110S Load aos 7 7 8 ioa Load a 8 Pg _ O10 2 79 COM 9 9 COM TES i Hol Hol 24 VDC sj opm 12 12 Wire COM terminals A9 and B9 and 0 terminals A10 and B10 even though they are connected internally 115 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 116 Expansion I O Unit with 24 I O Points Sinking Outputs CPM2C 24EDTC Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC 2 4 A common Outputs IR word n B A 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 Expansion I O Unit with 24 I O Points Sourcing Outputs CPM2C 24EDT1C Output capacity Max common capacity 300 mA 24 VDC Load Load Load Load 24 VDC 2 4 A common A B 011100 1 011101 2 011102 3
156. and trigger an interrupt executing the interrupt program when the count matches the target value Four interrupt inputs can be used in the 20 and 32 point CPU Units and two interrupt inputs can be used in the 10 point CPU Units CPM2C PCs with transistor outputs have two outputs that can produce 10 Hz to 10 kHz pulses single phase outputs When used as single phase pulse outputs there can be two outputs with a fre quency range of 10 Hz to 10 kHz with a fixed duty ratio or 0 1 to 999 9 Hz with a variable duty ratio 0 to 100 duty ratio When used as pulse plus direction or up down pulse outputs there can be just one output with a frequency range of 10 Hz to 10 kHz High speed Input Capabilities for Machine Control High speed Interrupt Input Function Quick response Input Function Stabilizing Input Filter Function Other Functions Interval Timer Interrupts The 20 point and 32 point CPU Units have 4 inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs and the 10 point CPU Units have 2 inputs that can be used as interrupt inputs These inputs are shared with quick response inputs and interrupt inputs in counter mode and have a minimum input signal width of 50 us and response time of 0 3 ms When an interrupt input goes ON the main program is stopped and the interrupt program is executed Regardless of the cycle time the 20 point and 32 point CPU Units have 4 inputs that can be used as quick response inputs and the 10 point CPU
157. and writes data in this memory area during execution Part of the I O memory contains the bits that reflect the status of the PC s inputs and outputs Parts of the memory are cleared when the power is turned ON and other parts are retained Refer to Section 3 Memory Areas in the Programming Manual W353 for more details on memory This is the program written by the user The CPM2C executes the program cycli cally Refer to 1 3 5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts for details The program can be divided broadly into two parts the program that is executed cyclically and the interrupt programs that are executed only when the corresponding interrupt is generated The PC Setup contains various startup and operating parameters The PC Set up parameters can be changed from a Programming Device only they cannot be changed from the program Some parameters are accessed only when PC s power supply is turned ON and others are accessed regularly while the power is ON It will be necessary to turn the power OFF and then ON again to enable a new setting if the parameter is accessed only when the power is turned ON Refer to Section 1 PC Setup in the Programming Manual W353 for more de tails The Communications Switch determines whether the peripheral port and RS 232C port connected through the communications port operate with the standard communications settings or the communications settings in the PC Setup 1 3 2 O
158. anges to memory confirm the safety of the destination node before transfer Not doing so may result in injury Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 to a torque of 0 74 to 0 9 Nem Loose screws may result in burning or malfunction Do not connect the 24 VDC output service power supply or the Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 to an AC power supply Connecting it to an AC power sup ply will damage the internal circuit 4 Operating Environment Precautions N Caution N Caution Do not operate the control system in the following places Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera ture Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Locations subject to shock or vibration Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise xiii Application Precautions 5 xiv N Caution Locations subjec
159. area Starting address of Unit 19 write data area Starting address of Unit 19 write variable type area Unit 20 communications type Starting address of Unit 20 read data area Starting address of Unit 20 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 20 write data area Starting address of Unit 20 write variable type area Unit 21 communications type Starting address of Unit 21 read data area Starting address of Unit 21 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 21 write data area Starting address of Unit 21 write variable type area Unit 22 communications type Starting address of Unit 22 read data area Starting address of Unit 22 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 22 write data area Starting address of Unit 22 write variable type area Unit 23 communications type Starting address of Unit 23 read data area Starting address of Unit 23 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 23 write data area Starting address of Unit 23 write variable type area Unit 24 communications type Starting address of Unit 24 read data area Starting address of Unit 24 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 24 write data area Starting address of Unit 24 write variable type area Unit 25 communications type Starting address of Unit 25 read data area Starting address of Unit 25 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 25 write da
160. atings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PC System to the above mentioned applications Safety Precautions NWARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING Connect the ground terminal of the Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 to a ground or 100 or less Not doing so may result in electric shock Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock Provide safety measures in external circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller including the following items in order to ensure safety
161. ation is used to insert or delete instructions from the program It is pos sible in PROGRAM mode only RUN PROGRAM To demonstrate this operation an IR 00105 NO condition will be inserted at program address 00206 and an IR 00103 NO condition deleted from address 00205 as shown in the following diagram 4 Address Instruction Operands 00100 00101 00103 00104 Address P 00201 00102 Delete 00105 Delete 00205 00103 insert dr 00206 AND NOT 00104 00207 01000 END 01 00208 ENDO Original Program Insertion Follow the procedure below to insert the IR 00105 NO condition at address 00206 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the address where the NO condition will be inserted and press the Down Arrow Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes n 00206READ 2 Jio 8 JL 3 Input the new instruction and press the INS Key and 8 YA YF 00206INSERT EJERCER 4 Press the Down Arrow Key to insert the new instruction 00207INSERT END m AND 00104 Note For instructions that require more operands such as set values input the operands and then press the WRITE Key Deletion Follow the procedure below to delete the IR 00103 NO condition at address 00205 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the addre
162. ations Unit from Stop to RUN Note Syntax Errors DM Allocation Errors Delaying the Communications Response with Components Note Observe the following precautions when communicating with components The time required to refresh read or write data varies with the CPM2C s cycle time Moreover the refreshing interval is not fixed Power is supplied to the Simple Communications Unit and the CPU Unit at the same time After the power is turned ON the Simple Communications Unit will attempt to establish communications with the CPU Unit and will wait for a re sponse If there is no response from the CPU Unit after retrying for 2 minutes a fatal error will occur and the ERR indicator will light It is not possible for the Simple Communications Unit to write data to the CPU Unit if the CPU Unit is in RUN mode Just before writing data the CPU Unit s operating mode is checked with the STATUS READ host link command If the CPU Unit is found to be in RUN mode the mode is changed to MONITOR mode with the STATUS WRITE host link command so that the data can be written When a data write error occurs because the CPU Unit was changed to RUN mode from a Programming Device the Simple Communications Unit will at tempt to change the operating mode and write data twice If these retries fail a fatal error will occur and the ERR indicator will light The Simple Communications Unit must be switched from Stop to RUN in order to va
163. be displayed by pressing the MONTR Key If the MONTR Key is pressed alone the display will shift to the right If more than six bits and words are input monitoring of the bit or word input first will be canceled 4 Press the CLR Key to stop monitoring the leftmost bit or word and clear it from the display 00001 000 OFF 0100 5 Press the SHIFT and CLR Keys to end monitoring altogether SHIFT CLR 00000 an CONT 00001 Press the SHIFT Key CLR Key and then CLR Key again to return to the initial Programming Console display with the multiple address monitoring state unchanged Press the SHIFT Key and then the MONTR Key from the initial dis play to return to the multiple address monitoring state The monitoring states can be retained for 6 bits and words The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode CLR 4 4 13 Differentiation Monitor 1 2 3 174 This operation is used to monitor the up or down differentiation status of a particular bit When detected the up or down differentiation will be displayed and the buzzer will sound It is possible in any mode MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in 4 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor If 2 or more bits are being monitored the de sired bit should be
164. below to display and clear messages 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the FUN and then the MONTR Key to begin the operation If there are no messages the following display will appear 2g ERR MSG CHK OK FUN MONTR If there are messages the most serious message will be displayed when the MONTR Key is pressed Pressing MONTR again will clear the present mes sage and display the next most serious error message Continue pressing MONTR until all messages have been cleared These are some examples of error messages A memory error MEMORY ERR lt 2 5 D A system error SYS FAIL FALOI IMONTR A message displayed with MSG 46 MATERIAL USED UP IMONTR All messages cleared ERR MSG CHK OK IMONTR 4 4 4 Buzzer Operation 164 This operation is used to turn on and off the buzzer that sounds when Program ming Console keys are pressed This buzzer will also sound whenever an error occurs during PC operation Buzzer operation for errors is not affected by this setting This operation is possible in any mode RUN T PROGRAM Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 Key Sequence 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to turn the key input buzzer on and off 1 Press the CLR SHIFT and then the CLR Key to bring up the mode display In this case the PC is in PROGRAM mode and the buzzer is ON
165. between the PC Setup settings the setting of SW2 and the startup operating mode for previous CPU Units is shown in the following table PC Setup CPM2C Operating Mode Address Bits Setting 08 to 15 According to communications switch SW2 and peripheral port device Peripheral device SW2 setting OFF ON Nothing connected PROGRAM mode RUN mode Programming According to Programming PROGRAM mode Console Console key switch See note Other PROGRAM mode PROGRAM mode See note Note Communications will not be possible between the CPM2C and the peripheral device for these combinations Mode used immediately before power interruption Mode specified in bits 00 to 07 00 to 07 PROGRAM mode MONITOR mode RUN mode Note 1 The default setting for DM 6600 bits 06 to 15 is 00 Hex i e according to the communications switch on the front panel If SW2 is set for connecting a de vice other than a Programming Console to the peripheral connector the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode as soon as power is turned ON Be sure that adequate precautions are taken to ensure safety 2 If SW2 is for connecting a device other than a Programming Console to the peripheral connector the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode as soon as power is turned ON even if a device is connected to the RS 232C port Be sure that adequate precautions are taken to ensure safety 30 Changes SW2 Section 1 7
166. burning or malfunction The 24 VDC service power supply terminals on the terminal block can be used for input power supply 24 VDC Can be used for input power supply Use the following to obtain the capacity of the service power supply that can be used Example CPU Unit 5 Expansion I O Units 1 W Power Consumption Power consumption 4 CPU Unit s power consumption 1 Expansion I O Unit s power consumption x 5 No of Expansion I O Units 9 W Service power supply current 14 4 CPM2C PA201 s rated capacity 9 power consumption 24 V 208 mA If the 24 VDC output either the service power supply or the power supply to the CPU Unit is overloaded or is short circuited the voltage will drop and the output will turn OFF Take external countermeasures to ensure the safety of the system in such an event Failure to do so may result in a serious accident Do not connect a power supply to the service power supply terminals If an AC power supply is mistakenly connected to these terminals the internal circuitry will be damaged Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 4 Removing and Wiring I O Terminal Blocks The following tables provide terminal block specifications terminal blocks Terminal Block Specification ificati specifications Screw size M2 Recommended tightening torque 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Recommended Wire and Item Specification Terminals 2 Solid wire 0
167. capacitance of the capacitor must be 1 to 0 5 uF per contact current of 1A and resistance of the resistor must be 0 5 to 1 per contact voltage of 1 V These values however vary with the load and the characteristics of the relay Decide these values from experiments and take into consideration that the capacitance suppresses spark discharge when the contacts are separated and the resistance limits the current that flows into the load when the circuit is closed again The dielectric strength of the capacitor must be 200 to 300 V If the circuit is an AC circuit use a capacitor with no polarity Diode method Inductive load The diode connected in parallel with the load changes energy accumulated by the coil into a current which then flows into the coil so that the current will be converted into Joule heat by the resistance of the inductive load This time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is reset caused by this method is longer than that caused by the CR method The reversed dielectric strength value of the diode must be at least 10 times as large as the circuit voltage value The forward current of the diode must be the same as or larger than the load current The reversed dielectric strength value of the diode may be two to three times larger than the supply voltage if the surge protector is applied to electronic circuits with low circuit voltag
168. could damage the PC or PC Units Always heed these pre cautions Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines momentary power interruptions or other causes Use the correct power supply voltage e Construct a control circuit so that power supply for the I O circuits does not come ON before power supply for the Unit If power supply for the I O circuits comes ON before power supply for the Unit normal operation may be tempo rarily interrupted f the operating mode is changed from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode with the Hold Bit ON the output will hold the most recent status In Such a case ensure that the external load does not exceed specifications If operation is stopped because of an operation error including FALS instruc tions the values in the internal memory of the CPU Unit will be saved but the outputs will all turn OFF For models with only the super capacitor installed the contents of the READ WRITE enable area of the DM area HR area AR area and CNT data area may be damaged if the power is turned OFF for a long time To prevent such damage provide ladder program that will check AR 1314 in order to ensure proper operation of the system Application Precautions 5 The life expectancy of the output relay varies considerably according to its switching capacity and switching con
169. d as the component communications protocol words 245 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Note Read Data Area Digital Panel Meters 18 words 246 The starting address of the read data area is specified in the control data area Select any one of the 5 command groups to specify which PVs and SVs will be read although 11 DM words will be allocated to the read data area regard less of the command group selected Offset Command group Response monitor Present temperature Status Target temperature Alarm 1 SV Alarm 2 SV Proportional band Reset time Derivative time Heater current monitor Heater current status Response Monitor Area Offset 0 The structure of the response monitor area is the same whether SYSWAY or CompoWay F communications are used See Response Monitor Area on page 242 for details on the response monitor area Read Data Offset 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 Each word of data read from the Temperature Controller has a value ranging from 0000 to FFFF which is 2 s complement signed binary data The word will contain 0000 if a communications error occurred The following example shows the contents of the read data when a communications error occurred while read ing the target temperature in command group 1 Response Monitor Area Contains the error code e Present temperature Contains data read from Temperature Contro
170. d only DM area DM 6144 through DM 6599 Changes to the PC Setup DM 6600 through DM 6655 A SCAN TIME OVER error won t occur during these operations Be sure to take this delay in the CPM2C s I O response times into account when per forming online editing 5 1 3 CPM2C Test Run Procedure 1 2 3 1 Power Supply Application a Check the CPM2C s power supply voltage and terminal connections b Check the devices power supply voltage and terminal connections C Turn ON the power supply and check that the PWR indicator lights d Use a Programming Device to set the CPM2C to PROGRAM mode 2 Wiring Checks 192 Self diagnostic Functions Section 5 2 Note a With the CPM2C in PROGRAM mode check the output wiring by turning ON the output bits with the force set and force reset operations Refer to 4 4 24 Force Set Reset for details b Check the input wiring with the CPM2C s input indicators or a Program ming Device s monitor operations 3 Test Run a Use a Programming Device to set the CPM2C to RUN or MONITOR mode and check that the RUN indicator lights b Check the sequence of operation with the force set reset operations etc 4 Debugging Correct any programming errors that are detected 5 Saving the Program a Use a Programming Device to write the program to a backup floppy disk b Print out a hard copy of the program with a printer Refer to Section 4 Using Programming Devices for detai
171. decimal 183 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 4 4 27 Displaying the Cycle Time This operation is used to display the current average cycle time scan time It is possible only in RUN or MONITOR mode while the program is being executed MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the MONTR Key to display the cycle time j 000005 TIME 012 1MS 5 in the display indicates the unit ms for the cycle time There might be differences in displayed values when the MONTR Key is pressed repeatedly These differences are caused by changing execution conditions 4 4 28 Reading and Setting the Clock This operation is used to read or set the CPU s clock The clock can be read in any mode but can be set in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only Open MONTOR 7 PROGRAM Read clock Set clock No 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the FUN Key SHIFT Key and then the MONTR Key to display the date and time FUN SHIFT JMONTR TM 99 02 22 rn por 11 04 32 MON 1 3 Press the CHG Key to change the date and or time CHG 99 02 82 11 04 32 MON 1 CHG The digit that can be changed will flash If necessary input a new value with the Up and Down Arrow Keys or Numeric Keys Press the CHG Key to move the cursor to th
172. devices Device Circuit diagram Relay output 5 mA 6 mA 8 mA NPN open collector Sensor 1 Output O NPN current output Use the same power supply for the input and sensor current circuit PNP current output supply 5 mA 6 8 mA om Voltage output Q COM Flom Note Do not use the following wiring with voltage output devices EET Incorrect Wiring 107 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 High speed Counter Inputs Using IR 00000 to IR 00002 as High speed Counter Inputs In these examples Encoders with an external 24 VDC open collector output are connected Differential Phase Mode Pulse Plus Direction Input Mode Count frequency 5 kHz Count frequency 20 kHz CPM2C CPM2C 00001 B phase input Sensor or switc 00002 Z phase input 00000 A phase input 00000 Pulse input Encoder 00001 Direction input 00002 Reset input 24 VDC 24 VDC Up Down Mode Increment Mode Count frequency 20 kHz Count frequency 20 kHz CPM2C 2 Encoder 00000 CW input 00000 Pulse input Sensor 00001 CCW input 00001 Normal input Sensor 00002 Normal input COM 24 VDC 24 VDC Note CW is clockwise and CCW is counter clockwise Using IR 00003 to IR 00006 as Interrupt Inputs Counter Mode In these examples an Encoder with an external 24 VDC open collector output is connected Increment or decrement Count frequenc
173. ditions If the output relay is used beyond its life expectancy its contacts may become fused or burned e Install the Units properly so that they will not fall off Be sure that all the mounting screws terminal screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction Be sure that the terminal blocks and other items with locking devices are prop erly locked into place Improper locking may result in malfunction Be sure that terminal blocks and connectors are connected in the specified di rection with the correct polarity Not doing so may result in malfunction If the power supply for the circuits is turned ON with the input and output connec tors reversed the fuse of output transistor may be blown Use the Unit with the battery housing cover in place to prevent dust or foreign matter from entering inside the Unit Not doing so may result in malfunction Install the expansion I O connector cover to the last Unit Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit to prevent dust or foreign matter from entering inside the Unit Not doing so may result in malfunction Be sure to attach the labels supplied with the CPM2C or provide other protec tive covers when wiring in order to prevent dust or wiring cuttings from entering the Unit Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipa tion Leaving t
174. dly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described 4 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor If two or more words are being monitored the desired word should be leftmost on the display D0000 Word monitor DE 2 Press the CHG Key to begin hexadecimal BCD data modification PRES VAL D0000 0119 3 Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV The operation will end and the normal monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed Ce JC Joe Jen 2 0 0 WRITE CHG 0200 179 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 4 4 21 Binary Data Modification Z N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the status of a word s bits when the word is monitored using the procedure described in 4 4 14 Binary Monitor It is pos sible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Bits SR 25300 to SR 25507 and timer counter flags cannot be changed Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of ou
175. e The operating mode of the CPM2C when the power is turned ON depends upon the PC Setup settings and the Programming Console s mode switch setting if a Programming Console is connected PC Setup setting Operating mode Word Bits Setting Programming Console Programming Console not connected connected DM 6600 08 to 15 Mode set on Programming RUN mode Console mode switch Startup mode is the same as the operating mode before power was interrupted Startup mode is determined by bits 00 to 07 00 to 07 PROGRAM mode MONITOR mode RUN mode 1 The default setting for DM 6600 bits 06 to 15 is 00 Hex i e to start with the mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch If a Programming Console is not connected to the peripheral connector on the CPU Unit the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode as soon as power is turned ON Be sure that adequate precautions are taken to ensure safety 2 The setting of SW2 will affect the startup operating mode for all Units with lot numbers of 31800 August 2000 or earlier Refer to 1 7 Changes in SW2 for details 1 3 4 PC Operation at Startup Time Required for Initialization Power OFF Operation 14 1 2 3 The time required for startup initialization depends on several factors such as the operating conditions including power supply voltage system configuration and ambient temperature and the program contents Minimum Power Supply Voltage
176. e Block Diagram 20 120 OV ES 2 2 9 AC Power Supply Unit Front View Bottom Side 1 Terminal block 2 LED indicator n i 3 CPU Unit power supply connector 1 2 3 1 Terminal Block Terminals for AC power supply input and service power supply 24 VDC 2 LED Indicator Lights when power is supplied 3 CPU Unit Power Supply Connector Use the connecting cable provided as an accessory to connect this connec tor to the power supply connector on the CPU Unit 24 VDC Note The ratings for the CPM2C PA201 AC Power Supply Unit are 100 to 240 VAC input 24 VDC 600 mA output The maximum current that can be supplied via the CPU Unit power supply connector and the service power supply terminals on the terminal block is 600 mA 78 SECTION 3 Installation and Wiring This section provides information on installing and wiring a CPM2C PC Be sure to follow the directions and precautions in this section when installing the CPM2C in a panel or cabinet wiring the power supply or wiring I O 3 1 Design PrecautiOns uere esr ti rex Pee e EAE 80 3 1 1 Power Supply 80 3 1 2 Power Supply Voltage 80 3 1 3 Interlock and Limit 8 80 3 2 Selecting an Installation Site 81 3 2
177. e FAL No Meaning and appropriate response SYS FAIL FAL 01 to 99 An FAL 06 instruction has been executed in the program Check the FAL number to is 01 to 99 or 9B determine conditions that would cause execution correct the cause and clear the error 9B An error has been detected in the PC Setup Check flags AR 1300 to AR 1302 and correct as directed AR 1300 ON An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6614 when power was turned ON Correct the settings in PROGRAM Mode and turn ON the power again AR 1301 ON An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup DM 6615 to DM 6644 when switching to RUN or MONITOR mode Correct the settings in PROGRAM Mode and switch to RUN or MONITOR mode again AR 1302 ON An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup DM 6645 to DM 6655 during operation Correct the settings and clear the error 194 Self diagnostic Functions Section 5 2 Message Meaning and appropriate response SCAN TIME OVER The cycle time has exceeded 100 ms SR 25309 will be ON This indicates that the program cycle time is longer than recommended Reduce cycle time if possible The CPM2C be set so that this error won t be detected Battery error If the Low Battery Detection Switch is ON and the voltage of the CPM2C BATO1 no message backup battery is below the minimum level the ERR ALM indicator will flash and SR 25308 will be turned ON See page 47 for details
178. e at the IR 00002 and the IR 00002 and 00003 terminals IR 00003 terminals Operation OK Yes No No Are the terminal screws loose or con nectors disconnected Operation OK Yes No Yes A Is input wiring correct No Check operation by using a dummy input signal to turn the input ON and OFF Tighten the terminal screws and connect Wire correctly connectors Operation OK Yes Replace the CPU Unit Replace the CPU Unit Check input devices Return to start Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit or LS1 and LS2 Expansion Unit Expansion I O Unit 203 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 5 5 Environmental Conditions Check 204 Environmental conditions check Consider using a fan or cooler Is the ambient temperature 2 Is the ambient temperature above 0 C Consider using a heater Is the ambient humidity between 10 and Consider using an air conditioner Install surge protec tors or other noise reducing equipment at noise sources Is noise being controlled Consider constructing an instrument panel or cabinet Is the installation environment okay Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 5 5 Memory Error Check Memory error occurred Yes Replace the CPU No AR 1314 ON Yes Check correct backed up data and clear error No Yes Check the program correct any AR 130
179. e control applications and it is small enough to be incorporated as the control unit in almost any free standing machine The full complement of communications functions provide communications with personal computers other OMRON PCs and OMRON Programmable Termi nals These communications capabilities allow the user to design a low cost dis tributed production system omron 2 CPU Units with 10 I O points relay or transistor outputs or with 20 or 32 I O points transistor outputs only are available Expansion Units can be connected to increase capacity to 192 I O points The CPM2C PCs are one piece PCs with 10 20 or 32 I O points in I O terminals or a built in connector There are 3 types of outputs available relay outputs sinking transistor outputs and sourcing transistor outputs All CPM2C PCs re quire 24 VDC power supply Up to 5 Expansion I O Units can be connected to the CPU Unit to increase the PC s I O capacity to a maximum of 192 I O points There are 23 different Expan sion I O Units available including Units with 10 I O points 24 I O points 32 I O points 8 input points 8 output points 16 inputs points and 16 output points The maximum capacity of 192 I O points is achieved by connecting five 32 point Expansion Units to a CPU Unit with 32 built in points The same Programming Devices such as Programming Consoles and Support Software can be used for the C200H C200HS C200HX HG H
180. e input Then enter the correct input The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input allowing no writing CHG 4 4 23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification Z N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to change the decimal value of a word being moni tored as unsigned decimal data within a range of 0 to 65 535 A change into hexadecimal data is made automatically Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor unsigned decimal the status of the word for which the present val ue is to be changed 200 Unsigned decimal monitor 2 Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification 181 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 PRES VAL 200 65520 3 Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV The operation will end and the decimal without sign monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed The PV can be set within a range of 0 to 65 535 p WRITE Le Je me If an erron
181. e next digit The following table shows the setting ranges for each value Year Second Day of week Day of week fe mE m E 00 to 59 0106 SUN to SAT 4 Press the WRITE Key to write the new value INST TBL READ WRITE Mere FUNOI8 HEX Press the CLR Key to return to the initial display 184 Programming Example Section 4 5 4 5 Programming Example This section demonstrates all of the steps needed to write a program with the Programming Console 4 5 1 Preparatory Operations Use the following procedure when writing a program to the CPM2C for the first time 1523 1 Set the Programming Console s mode switch to PROGRAM mode and turn on the CPM2C s power supply The password input display will appear on the Programming Console MONITOR RUN PROGRAM N PROGRAM PASSWORD 2 Enter the password by pressing the CLR and then the MONTR Key PROGRAM BZ MONTRI 3 Clear the CPM2C s memory by pressing the CLR SET NOT RESET and then the MONTR Key Press the CLR Key several times if memory errors are displayed 00000 CLR NER 00000MEMORY CLR p Jenn ext DM emm 00000MEMORY CLR po END HR CNT DM 4 Display and clear error messages by pressing the CLR FUN and then the MONTR Key Continue pressing the MONTR Key until all error messages have been cleared 00000 CLR EUN 00000 FUN 0 ERR M
182. e that there are 103 words available for the Control Data Area regardless 234 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 of the number of connected Units The starting DM address is set with Operation Switch SW2 Refer to Operation Switch SW2 on page 228 for details Simple Communications Unit control Simple Communications Unit status Syntax error DM address Communications control for Units 0 to 7 Communications control for Units 8 to 15 Communications control for Units 16 to 23 Communications control for Units 24 to 31 Unit 0 communications type Starting address of Unit 0 read data area Starting address of Unit 0 read variable type 2 Starting address of Unit O write data area Starting address of Unit O write variable type area Unit 1 communications type Starting address of Unit 1 read data area Starting address of Unit 1 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 1 write data area Starting address of Unit 1 write variable type area OD om BR OO PM Unit 31 communications type Starting address of Unit 31 read data area Starting address of Unit 31 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 31 write data area Starting address of Unit 31 write variable type area Note 1 These words are used to notify the CPU Unit of the Simple Communications Unit s status 2 The functions in parentheses are for CompoWa
183. ecification but the Does not support coordinate system must be set to absolute absolute pulse coordinates specification INT 89 INTERRUPT CONTROL Supports a count up interrupt for incrementing Does not support this counters interrupt function 26 Comparison with the CPM1A and 2 Section 1 5 Z N Caution Added Function Code Allocations Before using a CPM1A program containing one or more of the instructions in the table above check the program to be sure that it will operate properly and edit the program if necessary The CPM2C may not operate properly if a pro gram with these instructions is transferred and executed unchanged The following three instructions are allocated function codes that were not used in the CPM1A Instruction RXD 47 RECEIVE TXD 48 TRANSMIT Not allocated NOP 00 SCL 66 SCALING Differences in I O Memory The following table shows differences in the SR area PV is the abbreviation for SR Area Differences AR Area Differences Note present value Function Pulse output 0 PV SR 228 to SR 229 Pulse output 1 PV SR 230 to SR 231 Pulse output 0 PV Reset Bit SR 25204 Pulse output 1 PV Reset Bit SR 25205 RS 232C Port Reset Bit SR 25209 Battery Error Flag SR 25308 Changing RS 232C Port Setup Flag SR 25312 The following table shows differences in the AR area Funct
184. eck the CPU Unit s LED indicators and the Programming Console s dis play Clear the PC s memory All Clear Make PC Setup settings Refer to 3 3 Installing the CPM2C and 4 3 4 Preparation for Operation for details Note The setting of SW2 will affect the operating mode for all Units with lot numbers of 31800 August 2000 or earlier Refer to 1 7 Changes in SW2 for details 5 Create Ladder Program Create a ladder program to control the system Refer to Section 4 Using Programming Devices and the Programming Manual for details 6 Write Ladder Program in PC Write the ladder program in the PC with the Programming Console or transfer the program to the PC from the Support Software Refer to Section 4 Using Programming Devices to the SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals and to the CPT User Manual for details 7 Test Run e Check I O wiring in PROGRAM mode e Check and debug program execution in MONITOR mode Refer to Section 5 Test Runs and Error Processing for details 1 7 Changes in SW2 The connection of a Programming Console to the peripheral connector is auto matically detected for CPU Units with lot numbers of 0190O 1 September 2000 or later This has resulted in a change to the operation of SW2 on the front of the CPU Unit Check the lot number to confirm the operation of SW2 for any of the following model numbers before attempting operations CPU Units with Changed Specifications for SW2 Units with
185. ections 107 input specifications CPU Units 36 Expansion I O Units 39 inputs wiring 97 configuration 97 inrush current 34 suppressing 132 inspections 206 installation 84 site selecting 81 instructions inserting and deleting Programming Console 171 searching Programming Console 169 insulation resistance 34 interlocks 80 interrupt program execution in cyclic operation 18 Index L M leakage current 109 LED indicators 46 limit switches preventing false inputs 109 machine control functions list 19 maintenance 206 accessories 264 functions 21 memory backup 36 Expansion Memory Unit 209 protection 36 memory areas clearing Programming Console 163 partial clear 163 uploading downloading 210 messages reading clearing 164 model numbers 261 modes changing the PC mode 159 operating modes 13 modifying binary data Programming Console 180 data Programming Console 177 hexadecimal BCD data Programming Console 179 signed decimal data Programming Console 180 SV Programming Console 178 unsigned decimal data Programming Console 181 MONITOR mode description 149 159 example test run 190 monitoring 3 word monitor Programming Console 176 binary monitor Programming Console 175 176 differentiation monitor Programming Console 174 175 signed decimal monitor Programming Console 176 177 status Programming Console 172 unsigned decimal monitor Progra
186. ed to the CPM2C In addition to the conven tional PC Remote I O type of distributed I O control PC miniature dis tributed CPU control is now possible This means increased modularization allowing greater standardization of design improved suitability to special needs and easier replacement of malfunctioning Units Simple Communications A Simple Communications Unit can be added to achieve data transfers with gen Unit eral purpose communications components without preparing communications programs in the PC Up to 32 communications components can be connected including a combination of communications components supporting the Com poWay F protocol along with temperature controllers and Digital Panel Meters supporting the SYSWAY protocol The Simple Communications Unit is due for release in December 2000 2 Features Functions Section 1 1 Complete Communications Capabilities Host Link No protocol Communications High speed 1 1 NT Link Communications One to one PC Link A Host Link connection can be made through the PC s communications port used as a RS 232C or peripheral port A personal computer or Programmable Terminal connected in Host Link mode can be used for operations such as read ing writing data in the PC s memory or reading changing the PC s operating mode Host Link Communications 1 N Host Link Communications B500 ALO04 Adapter assessed 1001
187. en if it won t run properly in the CPM2C An error message will be displayed and the values will not be accepted if a data area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C data area is entered for moni toring an instruction operand or a timer counter SV SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 4 1 Available Program Memory Program Transfer Expansion Instructions The program capacity of the CQM1 7 200 words is greater than that of the 2 4 096 words and so the display will show more free space than is tually available Be sure to keep the actual program capacity in mind while pro gramming When the program is transferred from the PC to the CPT with the default function code assignments FUN18 FUN19 FUN87 and FUN88 will be displayed as TKY MCMP DSW and 7SEG The instructions however will be transferred correctly An error will occur if any instructions not supported by the CPT are transferred from the CPM2C When the program is transferred from the CPT to the PC TKY MCMP DSW and 7SEG will be displayed on the CPT but will not be executed in the CPU Unit They will be treated as 00 If expansion instructions are transferred to the PC with DM 6602 is set to the de fault settings or if instructions not supported by the CPM2C are transferred to the PC a message saying that expansion instructions cannot be written be cause DIP switch pin 4 is OFF will be displayed Change the setting of DM
188. eous input has been made press the CLR Key to restore the sta tus prior to the input Then enter the correct input The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input allowing no writing CHG 4 4 24 Force Set Reset 182 Z N Caution 1 2 3 This operation is used to force bits ON force set or OFF force reset and is useful when debugging the program or checking output wiring It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in 4 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor lf two or more words are being monitored the desired bit should be leftmost on the display 0000020000 Multiple address monitor OFF ON 2 Press the SET Key to force the bit ON or press the RESET Key to force the bit OFF 0000020000 ON The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set reset is in progress Bit status will remain ON or OFF only as long as the key is held
189. er as 2 s complement signed binary data If a communications error occurs while writing data the remaining write data will not be written The error code will be written to the response monitor area and the Write Command Bit will be reset to 0 The following example shows the results of the write operation when a commu nications error occurred while writing comparison value H in command group 4 Response Monitor Area Contains the error code Comparison value HH The SV will be written normally Comparison value SV won t be written e Comparison value SV won t be written e Comparison value LL SV won t be written The decimal point position has to be managed by the user since the Digital Panel Meter s decimal point position is not transferred in SYSWAY X format commu nications Operation Command Offset 2 Store the operation command code 0000 to 0004 in this word When a com mand group that includes the operation command is selected the correspond ing operation command will be sent to the Temperature controller Command code Operation Don t perform operation command No operation Reset Select backup mode Select RAM write mode Hold the Setting Adjust values When selecting the RAM write mode or backup mode program the selection op eration so that it is executed only one scan Some components write to 249 DM Settings and Component Comm
190. erminal Block CPU Units with 10 I O Points CPM2C 10C IDR D Inputs IR 000 24 VDC al 00001 __ 00000 o Input devices CPU Units with 20 I O Points CPM2C 20C IDR D Inputs IR 000 97 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Expansion I O Unit with 10 I O Points CPM2C 10EDR 24 VDC ss 00 Input devices Expansion I O Unit with 20 I O Points CPM2C 20EDR Inputs IR word m 24 VDC dT oom 00710 5 6 007109 007108 5000108 _ 000207 00506 gt 20 00705 E 00104 55 0003 000102 002201 oc 001100 Input devices Units with Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Connector CPU Units with 10 I O Points 2 10 IDT C D Inputs IR 000 24 VDC raba Input devices 98 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 CPU Units with 20 I O Points CPM2C 20C IDT C D Inputs IR 000 UJ A N gt Joo Jor o ws Jo fo a z Input devices Note COM terminals A9 and B9 are connected internally CPU Uni
191. ers on both sides of the connector before connecting the cable 2 Insert the cable into the connector and press in firmly until the lock levers lock into place 94 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 To remove the cable pull the lock lever out to the sides to release the lock mechanism and pull out the connector Note Be sure to make connections to terminal blocks and connectors with the correct direction and polarity Output transistor fuses may burn out if power is supplied to I O circuits with the I O connector connected in reverse 95 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 6 Using Terminals and Relay Terminals We recommend using the following I O Terminals and Relay Terminals to wire devices to the CPM2C s I O connector m s Inputs Cables See note Me ee Fujitsu compatible 0 Note The allowable current for the XW2Z Ais1A Do not allow the current on the common terminal to exceed 1 A Terminal Blocks Outout XW2Z A G79 XW2B 20G4 M3 screws utputs MIL connectors XW2B 20G5 M3 5 screws 079 XW2D 20G6 Cables See note Fujitsu compatible connectors Terminal Blocks XW2Z A MIL connectors XW2C 20G5 IN16 M3
192. es Varistor method Inductive load xviii The varistor method prevents the imposition of high voltage between the contacts by using the constant voltage characteristic of the varistor There is time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is reset If the supply voltage is 24 to 48 V insert the varistor in parallel with the load If the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V insert the varistor between the contacts SECTION 1 Introduction This section describes the CPM2C s special features and functions shows the possible system configurations and outlines the steps required before operation Read this section first when using the CPM2C for the first time Refer to the CPM I CPM IA CPM2A CPM2C SRM I V2 Programming Manual W353 for details on programming opera tions 1 1 CPM2C Features and Functions 2 Fli 2 nes pe LESE RBS PERI Mee eye Baad 2 1 1 2 Overview of CPM2C Functions 6 1 2 System Configurations 222222222222 RR I ERR ERE UU 8 1 25 15 BETA PE 8 1 2 2 Power Supply 1 9 1 2 3 CPU Unit Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units 9 1 5 Structure and Operation
193. es and wiring methods that will reduce noise in the communications lines and turn ON the Simple Communications Unit again Cannot write data while the CPU Check whether the CPU Unit is in RUN mode If so switch the CPU Unit Unit is in RUN mode to MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode and turn ON the power again A watchdog timer error occurred Watchdog timer errors are indicated in the Simple Communications Unit status word Refer to Simple Communications Unit Status on page 236 It is possible for noise to affect the Simple Communications Unit s processing If noise is suspected take steps to reduce noise around the Unit or shield the Unit The watchdog timer error can be cleared by turning the power supply OFF and then ON again DM allocation error See note The DM allocation may exceed the boundary of the CPM2C s DM Area When DM allocation error is detected error code 15 is written to the Simple Communications Unit Status word see page 236 To restore normal operation correct the DM allocation and switch the Unit from RUN to Stop and then back to RUN again Refer to Simple Communications Unit Control on page 235 for details on the RUN Stop Digit Note DM allocation errors are indicated in the Simple Communications Unit status word Refer to Simple Communications Unit Status on page 236 for details 7 7 2 Non fatal Errors ERR Indicator Flashing 252 Error Likely cause and correction There was
194. ess Variable 7 type Variable 7 address Variable 8 type Variable 8 address Variable 9 type Variable 9 address Variable 10 type Variable 10 address Variable 11 type Variable 11 address Variable 12 type Variable 12 address 278 DM Settings Assignment Sheets Appendix C Read Data Area CompoWay F Contents Variable name Response monitor area Reserved Always 0000 Variable 1 read data lower bytes Variable 1 read data upper bytes Variable 2 read data lower bytes Variable 2 read data upper bytes Variable 3 read data lower bytes Variable 3 read data upper bytes Variable 4 read data lower bytes Variable 4 read data upper bytes Variable 5 read data lower bytes Variable 5 read data upper bytes Variable 6 read data lower bytes Variable 6 read data upper bytes Variable 7 read data lower bytes Variable 7 read data upper bytes Variable 8 read data lower bytes Variable 8 read data upper bytes Variable 9 read data lower bytes Variable 9 read data upper bytes Variable 10 read data lower bytes Variable 10 read data upper bytes Variable 11 read data lower bytes Variable 11 read data upper bytes Variable 12 read data lower bytes Variable 12 read data upper bytes Contents Variable name Response mon
195. et 5 Units 16 to 23 Unit 23 Read Command Bit Offset 6 Units 24 to 31 Unit 31 Read Command Bit Unit 7 Write Command Bit Unit 15 Write Command Bit Unit 23 Write Command Bit Unit 31 Write Command Bit Unit 6 Read Command Bit Unit 14 Read Command Bit Unit 22 Read Command Bit Unit 30 Read Command Bit Unit 6 Write Command Bit Unit 14 Write Command Bit Unit 22 Write Command Bit Unit 30 Write Command Bit Unit 5 Read Command Bit Unit 13 Read Command Bit Unit 21 Read Command Bit Unit 29 Read Command Bit Unit 5 Write Command Bit Unit 13 Write Command Bit Unit 21 Write Command Bit Unit 29 Write Command Bit Unit 4 Read Command Bit Unit 12 Read Command Bit Unit 20 Read Command Bit Unit 28 Read Command Bit Unit 4 Write Command Bit Unit 12 Write Command Bit Unit 20 Write Command Bit Unit 28 Write Command Bit Unit 3 Read Command Bit Unit 11 Read Command Bit Unit 19 Read Command Bit Unit 27 Read Command Bit Unit 3 Write Command Bit Unit 11 Write Command Bit Unit 19 Write Command Bit Unit 27 Write Command Bit Unit 2 Read Command Bit Unit 10 Read Command Bit Unit 18 Read Command Bit Unit 26 Read Command Bit Unit 2 Write Command Bit Unit 10 Write Command Bit Unit 18 Write Command Bit Unit 26 Write Command Bit Unit 1 Read Command Bit Unit 9 Read Command Bit Unit 17 Read Command Bit
196. ever on the right side of the Programming Console The CQM1 PRO01 E s buzzer volume cannot be adjusted Low volume High volume C200H PRO27 E The buzzer volume can be turned on and off with a key operation See 4 4 4 Buzzer Operation for details Using a Programming Console Section 4 3 4 3 3 Changing the CPM2C s Mode with the Mode Switch Once the Programming Console has been connected its mode switch can be used to change the CPM2C s operating mode The mode display PRO GRAM gt lt gt or RUN will appear on the Programming Console Screen No key operations can be performed while the mode display is displayed on the Programming Console screen Press to clear the display so that key operations can be performed e If the SHIFT Key is pressed while the mode switch is turned the original dis play will remain on the Programming Console s screen and the mode display won t appear e CPM2C will enter RUN mode automatically if a Programming Console isn t connected when the CPM2C is turned on MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR RUN PROGRAM RUN PROGRAM RUN PROGRAM N 7 N 7 N 7 Mode display lt PROGRAM gt BZ lt MONITOR gt BZ lt RUN gt BZ Operation Initial display Operating Modes Z N Caution N Caution CLR Operation SHIFT CLR 00000 PROGRAM Mode
197. f 3 Units can be connected to the 30 point and 40 point CPU Units Available models Expansion I O Units Analog Unit Temperature Sensor Unit CompoBus S Link Unit and Simple Communications Unit Same as CPM2C Same as CPM2C 21 Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A memory Input bits IR 00000 to IR 00915 Same as 2 Section 1 5 Same as 2 Output bits IR 01000 to IR 01915 Same as 2 Same as 2 Work bits 928 bits IR 02000 to IR 04915 IR 20000 to IR 22715 Same as 2 512 bits IR 20000 to IR 23115 SR Special Relay area 448 bits SR 22800 to SR 25515 Same as 2 384 bits SR 23200 to SR 25515 TR Temporary Relay area 8 bits TRO to TR7 Same as 2 Same as 2 HR Holding Relay area 320 bits HR 0000 to HR 1915 Same as 2 AR Auxiliary Relay area 384 bits AR 0000 to AR 2315 Same as 2 256 bits AR 0000 to AR 1515 LR Link Relay area 256 bits LR 0000 to LR 1515 Same as 2 Same as 2 Timer Counter area 256 bits 000 to 255 Same as 2 128 bits TIM CNT 0 to TIM CNT 127 DM Data Memory area Read write area 2 048 words DM 0000 to DM 2047 Same as CPM2C 1 024 words DM 0000 to DM 1023 Read only area 456 words D
198. fer 150 SYSMAC Support Software SSS Section 4 2 Checking Operation in MONITOR Mode Use the following procedure to switch the CPM2C to MONITOR mode 1 2 3 1 Make sure that the SYSMAC CPT Support Software is online Select On line from the menu bar select Mode M and then MONITOR 2 Aconfirmation message will be displayed Click OK to switch to MONITOR mode Starting Operation in RUN Mode Use the following procedure to switch the CPM2C to RUN mode 1 2 3 1 Make sure that the SYSMAC CPT Support Software is online Select On line O from the menu bar select Mode and then RUN R 2 A confirmation message will be displayed Click OK to switch to RUN mode LII NENNEN us DK my abre PU cada al Lm e 4 2 SYSMAC Support Software SSS 4 2 1 Introduction The SSS is a complete programming and control package designed for C series and CVM1 POs It provides not only programming capabilities but also advanced debugging monitoring and program data management For further information and actual operating procedures please refer to the SYSMAC Sup port Software Operation Manuals Basics and C Series 151 SYSMAC Support Software SSS Section 4 2 CPM2C programming be performed with any version of the SSS Refer to 3 4 10 Programming Device Connections for details on connect
199. gramming Errors Section 5 4 Message IL ILC ERR Meaning and appropriate response IL 02 and ILC 03 are not used in pairs Correct the program so that each IL 02 has a unique ILC 03 Although this error message will appear if more than one IL 02 is used with the same ILC 03 the program will executed as written Make sure your program is written as desired before proceeding JMP JME ERR JMP 04 and JME 05 not used in pairs Make sure your program is written as desired before proceeding SBN RET ERR RET 93 has not been used properly or the relationship between SBN 92 and RET 93 is not correct Correct the program COIL DUPL The same bit is being controlled i e turned ON and or OFF by more than one instruction e g OUT OUT NOT DIFU 13 DIFD 14 KEEP 11 SFT 10 Although this is allowed for certain instructions check instruction requirements to confirm that the program is correct or rewrite the program so that each bit is controlled by only instruction JMP UNDEFD JME 05 has been used with no JMP 04 with the same jump number Add a JMP 04 with the same number or delete the JME 05 that is not being used SBS UNDEFD A subroutine exists that is not called by SBS 91 Program a subroutine call in the proper place or delete the subroutine if it is not required 197 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 5 5 5 5 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Use the f
200. he C200H PRO27 E Programming Console can be installed in a control panel as shown in the following diagram The C200H ATT01 Mounting Bracket is sold separately Mounting hole dimensions Mounting Bracket DIN43700 standards 1 0 Two screws fj 186 Panel thickness 1 0 to 3 2 mm 922 gt Allow at least 80 mm for the cable connector above the Programming Console be used About 70 mm is required 4 3 2 Compatible Programming Consoles There are three Programming Consoles that can be used with the CPM2C The CQM1H PROO1 E the COM1 PROO1 E and the C200H PRO27 E The key functions for these Programming Consoles are identical 156 Using Programming Console Section 4 3 Press and hold the Shift Key to input a letter shown in the upper left corner of the key or the upper function of a key that has two functions For example the CQM1 PRO01 E s AR HR Key can specify either the AR or HR Area press and release the Shift Key and then press the AR HR Key to specify the AR Area 01 lt RESET INS d WATE Attached Connecting Cable 2 m Attached Connecting Cable 2 m The CQM1H PROO1 E can be connected directly to the CPM2C C200H PRO27 E 1 01 LCD display
201. he PC Doing so may damage the EEPROM Mounting EEPROM 1 2 3 1 Lift up the lock lever 2 Straighten the pins on the EEPROM line up with the socket and lower into the socket as shown in the following diagram If the EEPROM is loose place it in the center of the socket Lift up the lock lever Insert the EEPROM 3 Gently hold down the EEPROM and pull down the lock lever Pull down the lock lever 212 Handling Section 6 3 Removing EEPROM Lift up the lock lever and detach the EEPROM 6 3 2 PC Connections N Caution N Caution CPM2C and CQM1H PCs Note CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CQM1 and SRM1 V2 PCs Peripheral Port Communications Settings Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1 EMU01 V1 before connecting the CPM1 EMU01 V1 to the PC Do not disconnect the CPM1 EMUO 1 V1 from the PC when the indicator is blink ing green When connecting to the CPM2C or CQM1H connect to the peripheral port via the CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable Also set the pins on the CPU Unit s DIP switch as follows CPM2C Pin 1 ON see note CQM1H Pin 5 ON see note If pin 1 on the CPM2C or pin 5 on the is OFF connection is still possible if the peripheral port is set to the defaults When connecting to the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CQM1 or SRM1 V2 insert the connector into the peripheral port making sure that the connector is oriented correctly e Insert the connect
202. he contents of data memory can be downloaded from the EEPROM to the PC using the procedure given below When downloading note the following points 215 Handling Section 6 3 216 N Caution Note Expansion Memory Unit EEPROM Indicator mat If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode when downloading is started it will auto ically switch to PROGRAM mode and operation will stop Confirm that no adverse effects will occur to the system before downloading Not doing so may result in unexpected operation 1 2 UPLOAD DM UPLOAD If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode switch the PC mode to PROGRAM mode Confirm that the program or other data to be downloaded to the PC is com patible with the PC before downloading For the CQM1 or CQM1H when downloading programs that use user as signed function codes for expansion instructions be sure that pin 4 on the CPU Unit s DIP switch is ON If these programs are downloaded while the pin is OFF the assignments for the expansion instructions will return to their default settings After downloading has been completed be sure to confirm the user pro gram data and expansion instructions When the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button is pressed all EEPROM data lad der programs data memory etc is written to the PC CPM2C CIF01 CPM2C TINI CPM2C CN111 CS1W CN114 EMUO1UPDOWNLOADER DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button CPM2C CIF01 Handli
203. he label attached may result in malfunction Use round crimp terminals for wiring the AC power supply input to the AC Pow er Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 For wiring the ground terminals or power sup ply service terminals use crimp terminals or solid wires Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning Be sure to perform wiring in accordance with the CPM2C Operation Manual Incorrect wiring may result in burning eUse specified connectors and wiring materials connector models C500 CE241 C500 CE242 C500 CE243 terminal block models AWG28 16 with stripped length of 7 mm Power Supply Unit terminal block AWG22 14 with stripped length of 7 mm Do not apply voltages to the input terminals in excess of the rated input voltage Excess voltages may result in burning Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the output terminals in excess of the maximum switching capacity Excess voltage or loads may result in burning Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short circuit ing in external wiring Insufficient safety measures against short circuiting may result in burning e Always use the power supply voltage specified in the operation manuals An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operat
204. hose in the CQM1 not all settings can be made from the menus These settings have to be made by writing data directly to the word containing the setting 4 3 Using a Programming Console This section provides information on connecting and using a Programming Con sole Refer to 5 3 Programming Console Operation Errors for details on errors that might occur during Programming Console operations 4 3 1 Connecting the Programming Console Note 154 A Programming Console can be connected to the CPM2C s communications port or the peripheral port on a CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable it cannot be connected to the CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable s RS 232C port Communications Switch The setting of SW2 will affect the startup operating mode for all Units with lot numbers of 31800 31 August 2000 or earlier Refer to 1 7 Changes in SW2 for details a With CPU Units with lot numbers of 31800 or earlier before connecting the Programming Console turn OFF Communications Switch SW2 on the front of the CPM2C CPU Unit The PRO indicator will light Communications Switches PRO Swi SW2 b If SW2 is turned OFF for a Programming Console connection a PT can not be used in PT Programming Console Mode connected to the RS 232C port Turn ON SW2 to specify that a Programming Console will not be connected before attempting to use PT Programming Console Mode for the RS 232C port Using Programming Console Section 4 3
205. ication Section 7 9 7 8 Data Refresh Intervals Reference Data The following table shows the period between data refreshes for various com munications conditions The actual period depends upon the system configura tion and size of the user program so these values are approximate Communications speed bps Number of components connected Communications protocol CompoWay F Read data items 12x 16 2 192 Write data items 12x16 192 Command group CompoWay F 12x 16 192 0 CompoWay F 12x 16 192 12x 16 192 CompoWay F 12 x 16 192 0 CompoWay F 1x16 16 0 CompoWay F 0 1 16 16 CompoWay F 0 1 16 16 CompoWay F 1 16 16 0 CompoWay F 0 1x16 16 SYSWAY Yes Yes SYSWAY Yes No SYSWAY Yes Yes SYSWAY Yes No SYSWAY No Yes SYSWAY No Yes SYSWAY No SYSWAY No Yes Note 1 The refresh period is not fixed because the communications response times of the components and the CPU Unit are not fixed The refresh periods shown in the table above are average times for the given conditions 2 The number of read data items and write data items show the number of data items read and written for each component When SYSWAY commu nications are used the number of items is determined by the command group that has been selected 7 9 Example Application This section shows the system conf
206. ifications Flat cable 4 core flat cable 0 75 mm VCTF cable 2 core x 0 75 mm 141 SECTION 4 Using Programming Devices This section outlines the operations possible with the SYSMAC CPT SYSMAC Support Software SSS and the Program ming Consoles Actual CPT operating procedures are provided in the CPT User Manual Actual SSS operating procedures are provided in the SSS Operation Manuals Basics and C series PCs Operations for WS02 CXPCI E CX Programmer are provided in the WS02 CXPCI E CX Programmer User Manual W361 and the CX Server User Manual W362 Refer to 3 4 10 Programming Device Connections and 4 3 1 Connecting the Programming Console for details on connecting a Programming Console or personal computer to the CPM2C 4 1 SYSMAC CPT Support Software 144 4 1 l Introduction eR d dene kn Re ce up RC Red ce mk ec e 144 4 12 Limitations and Precautions 144 4 1 3 Using SYSMAC CPT Support 146 4 2 SYSMAC Support Software SSS 151 4 2 1 Jntroducton i e ee ed aeo ege de iene EE 151 4 2 2 Limitations and Precautions 152 4 3 Using Programming Console 154 4 3 1 Connecting the Programming Console 154 4 3 2 Com
207. iguration and settings of an example system to help explain how to use the Simple Communications Unit 253 Example Application Section 7 9 7 9 1 System Configuration The example system has three Temperature Controllers connected to the Simple Communications Unit Simple Commu nications Unit CPU Unit Unit number 0 Connected by CompoWay F Constantly monitors the PV The target temperature is changed to 100 C by input condition 0005 Unit number 2 Unit number 3 Connected by SYSWAY Connected by SYSWAY Simple Communications Unit e The Simple Communications Unit writes reads command group 1 only a target temperature of 200 C when the power is turned ON and thereafter just reads command group 1 DM Allocation The DM allocation is shown in the following table Unit settings Area name All shared Control Data Area Unit 0 Unit 0 Read Variable Type Area Unit 0 Write Variable Type Area DM words DM 0000 to DM 0102 DM 0150 to DM 0154 DM 0160 to DM 0164 Communications with CPU Unit Communications with Components Unit 0 Read Data Area DM 0170 to DM 0173 Unit O Write Data Area DM 0180 to DM 0183 Unit 2 Read Data Area DM 0200 to DM 0210 Unit 2 Write Data Area DM 0220 to DM 0228 Unit 3 Read Data Area DM 0240 to DM 0250 Unit 3 Write Data Area Communications speed 19 200 bps Communications speed 19 200 bps DM 0260 t
208. ill be turned ON Data area COM range Input words IR 000 to IR 011 2 range IR 000 to IR 009 Output words IR 100 to IR 111 IR 010 to IR 019 Work words IR 012 to IR 099 IR 112 to IR 227 IR 020 to IR 049 IR 200 to IR 227 IR 050 to IR 199 cannot be used SR area SR 228 to SR 255 SR 228 to SR 255 HR area HR 00 to HR 99 HR 00 to HR 19 HR 20 to HR 99 cannot be used AR area AR 00 to AR 27 AR 00 to AR 23 AR 24 to AR 27 cannot be used LR area LR 00 to LR 63 LR 00 to LR 15 LR 16 to LR 63 cannot be used Timer Counter TIM CNT 000 to 511 000 to 255 TIM CNT 256 to 511 cannot be used Read write DM 0000 to DM 6143 DM 0000 to DM 1999 DM 2022 to DM 2047 DM 2048 to DM 6143 cannot be used Read only DM 6144 to DM 6568 DM 6144 to DM 6599 Error Log DM 6569 to DM 6599 DM 2000 to DM 2021 PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 DM 6600 to DM 6655 Since the PC model is set to 1 a program that will run properly in the COM will pass the program check even if it won t run properly in the CPM2C An error message will be displayed and the values will not be accepted if a data area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C data area is entered for moni toring time charts an instruction operand or a timer counter SV SYSMAC Support Software SSS Section 4 2 Transferring and Verifying DM Area Data Available Pr
209. imultaneously If an attempt to use these ports simultaneously is made communications will not be performed properly and this may result in malfunction of equipment Connector sess 1 2 3 1 Peripheral Port Used to connect to Programming Devices including Programming Consoles host computers or general purpose external devices Use a special connecting cable CS1W CN114 CS1W CN118 for connections Note The C200H PRO27 E Programming Console be connected directly to the CPM2C s Unit using a special connecting cable CS1W CN224 624 b Use the CS1W CN114 when using the port as a peripheral port Use the CS1W CN118 when using the port as a RS 232C port 74 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 RS 232C Port Used to connect to the RS 232C interface of a personal computer or Pro grammable Terminal operator interface Connector Pin Allocation 9 SG 5 CTS 8 NC 4 RTS 3 RxD 7 NC 6 5V 2 TxD 1 NC Internal Configuration CPM2C CIFO1 CPM2C CPU Unit Peripheral port CMOS level Peripheral port CMOS RS 232C E 1 CMOS level gt RS 232C port RS 232C conversion RS 232C RS 232C port D sub connector Peripheral port Signal Outputs signals from the CPU Unit s CMOS on conversion interface without conversion or converts CMOS CPM2C CIF01 level CPU Unit side to RS 232C connected device side Function Host Link peripheral bus no protocol or Programming Console co
210. ind the actual variable address 240 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Write Variable Type Area When CompoWay F has been specified as the component communications 27 words max protocol this write variable type area contains the variable type and variable address settings for the SVs that will be written Offset Contents Number of write items Operation command Starting address of write data area Variable 1 type Variable 1 address Variable 2 type Variable 11 type Variable 11 address Variable 12 type Variable 12 address Number of Write Items Offset 0 Range Function 0000 to 0012 Specify the number of variables that you want to write BCD For example the variables set in variable 1 type and variable 2 type will be written if the number of write items is set to 0002 Variables will not be written if the number of write items is set to 0000 in this case only the operation command is valid A syntax error will occur if the number of items specified in this word is not between 0000 and 0012 BCD Operation Command Offset 1 Range Function 0000 or 0001 The write data area s operation command is disabled when 0000 is specified The write data area s operation command is enabled to the component when 0001 is specified A syntax error will occur if the Operation Command is not 0000 or 0001 Starting Address of Write Data Area Offse
211. ing a personal computer to the CPM2C 4 2 2 Limitations and Precautions Program Input and Program Check Monitoring Online Editing and Set Values 152 When programming a CPM2C PC with the SSS set the PC model to CQM1 There are some software limitations because of differences between the CPM2C and CQM1 CPUs lt gt Busten setup I System Setup Ver 1 13 1 model CCUM1 C C PC interface Com1 Periph N Netuork address Net 00 G Nessage No 1 0 table transfer x PC model 1 A CVMl CPU21 CUM1 CPU11 CUM1 CPUO1 RK1 gt Ccz2000H C1000H CxexH Z00H interface Com1 P Printer model Wide D Data disk drive DutBitCommentType x M Exit to DOS movers o u e X M N 11 or CQM1 data areas are larger than the corresponding 2 data areas so the data area addresses that don t actually exist in the CPM2C or instructions not supported by the 2 can be input and won t be detected in the program check Be sure that the word and bit addresses are within the specified ranges and that all instructions are supported If a program contains a data area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C data area a memory error will be generated when the program is executed and the Memory Area Specification Error Flag AR 1308 w
212. inning to program the CPM2C Although memory is cleared before the CPU Unit is shipped the contents of the DM HR AR and counter areas may change in transit See 4 4 2 Clearing Memory for details on the All Clear operation 2 See 1 3 3 Operating Mode at Startup to determine what mode the CPM2C will enter when the power is turned ON 5 1 2 Flash Memory Precautions Observe the following precautions to protect the flash memory and ensure proper operation 1 2 3 1 If changes are made in the read only DM area DM 6144 through DM 6599 or PC Setup DM 6600 through DM 6655 the PC s operating mode must be changed to write the new contents to flash memory If backup battery is changed before the changes are written to flash memory the changes will be lost The changes can be saved by switching the CPM2C to RUN or MONITOR mode or turning the CPM2C OFF and then ON again 2 When contents of the program read only DM DM 6144 through DM 6599 or PC Setup DM 6600 through DM 6655 have been changed startup proc essing will take up to 1 200 ms longer than usual Be sure to take this one time startup delay into account if it may affect operations 3 If one of the following three operations is performed in MONITOR or RUN mode the CPM2C s cycle time will be extended by up to 1 200 ms and inter rupts will be disabled while the program or PC Setup is being overwritten e Program changes with the online edit operation Changes to the rea
213. input for CPM2C PCs 00017 FUN 0 00017 END 001 00018READ NOP 000 189 Programming Example Section 4 5 4 5 4 Checking the Program Check the program syntax in PROGRAM mode to make sure that the program has been input correctly 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 00000 CLR 2 Press the SRCH Key An input prompt will appear requesting the desired check level m 00000PROG CHK LBL 0 2 3 Input the desired check level 0 1 or 2 The program check will begin when the check level is input and the first error found will be displayed If no errors are found the following display will appear 00017PROG CHK END 001 00 1KW Note Refer to 5 4 Programming Errors for details on check levels and the programming errors that may be displayed during a program check 4 Press the SRCH Key to continue the search The next error will be dis played Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search The search will continue until an END 01 instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached If errors are displayed edit the program to correct the errors and check the pro gram again Continue checking the program until all errors have been corrected 4 5 5 Test Run in MONITOR Mode Switch the CPM2C in MONITOR mode and check the operation of the program 1 2 3 1 Set the Programming Console s mode
214. input points and 1 analog output point are available By mounting 4 Analog I O Units a maximum of 8 analog input points and 4 analog output points can be made available By using a combination of the PID instruction and PWM instruction time proportional control is possible e The ranges supported for analog input signals are 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10V 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA and the resolution is 1 6000 full scale The average processing function and power interruption detection function can used e The ranges supported for analog output signals are 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA and the resolution is 1 6000 full scale Temperature Sensor Up to 4 Temperature Sensor Units can be mounted to the CPM2C There are 2 Units models of Temperature Sensor Unit One for input from a thermocouple sensor and one for input from a platinum resistance thermometer sensor There are 2 input points on each Temperature Sensor Unit Thermocouple inputs and measurement ranges 200 to 1 300 C 0 0 to 500 0 C J 100 to 850 C 0 0 to 400 0 C Platinum resistance thermometer inputs and measurement ranges Pt100 200 0 to 650 0 C JPt100 200 0 to 650 0 C CompoBus S I O Link The 2 can be used as a CompoBus S Slave with 8 built in inputs and 8 Units built in outputs by connecting a CompoBus S Link Unit Up to 5 Compo Bus S I O Link Units can be connect
215. ion Double check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power sup ply Incorrect wiring or switch settings may result in burning e Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Changing the operating mode of the PC Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory XV EC Directives 6 Before touching the Unit be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static built up Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit Doing either of these may break the cables Do not apply forces exceeding 50 N to connector sections Do not place objects on top of the cables Doing so may break the cables Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM and HR Areas required for resuming operation Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual Improper installa tion of the Unit may result in malfunction When transporting the Units use special packing boxes Be careful not to ap ply excessive vibration or shock during transportation and not to drop the prod uct Store the Units within the following temperature and humidity
216. ion Clock calendar data AR 17 to AR 21 RS 232C Communications Error Code AR 0800 to AR 0803 RS 232C Error Flag AR 0804 RS 232C Transmission Enabled Flag AR 0805 RS 232C Reception Completed Flag AR 0806 RS 232C Reception Overflow Flag AR 0807 Peripheral Port Reception Completed Flag AR 0814 Peripheral Port Reception Overflow Flag AR 0815 RS 232C Reception Counter AR 09 High speed Counter Comparison Flag AR 1108 High speed Counter Overflow Underflow Flag AR 1109 Pulse Output 0 Output Condition AR 1111 Pulse Output 0 PV Overflow Underflow Flag AR 1112 Pulse Output 0 Pulse Quantity Set Flag AR 1113 Pulse Output 0 Output Completed Flag AR 1114 Pulse Output 1 PV Overflow Underflow Flag AR 1212 Pulse Output 1 Pulse Quantity Set Flag AR 1213 Pulse Output 1 Output Completed Flag AR 1214 Pulse Output 1 Output Status AR 1215 Not supported Not supported Power OFF Counter AR 23 See note programs that use 10 the Power OFF Counter cannot be used the CPM2C without editing the program In the CPM2C the Power OFF Counter is in AR 23 27 Preparation for Operation Section 1 6 DM Area Differences Note The following table shows differences in the DM area other than the PC Setup Function CPC Error Log Area DM 2000 to DM 2021 DM 1
217. ion 1 3 Note 1 Do not use the CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit with an Units other than CPM2C Units 2 The CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit is due for release in December 2000 Adapter Units Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Unit RS 422 232C Adapter Unit Conversion Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Unit CPU Units communications port gt CPM2C CIFO1 Peripheral port RS 232C port RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit CPU Unit s communications port gt CPM2C CIF 11 RS422 port RS 232C port Note 1 The CPM2C CIF01 cannot be used with any PC model other than the 2 A CPM2C CIF11 or another CPM2C CIFO01 cannot be connected onto CPM2C CIF01 2 Although a CPM2C CN111 can be connected to a CPM2C CIF01 it is not possible to use the peripheral port and the RS 232C port on the 2 111 simultaneously If an attempt is made to use both ports si multaneously communications will not be performed properly and incorrect operation may result 1 3 Structure and Operation 1 3 1 CPU Unit Structure The following diagram shows the internal structure of the CPU Unit memory PC Setup Program External output devices External input devices Input circuits Output circuits Settings Settings Commu nications port Communications Switch 12 Structure and Operation Section 1 3 Memory Note Program PC Setup Note Communications Switch The program reads
218. ion contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system Intended Audience see s ene Ere ORDER BARRONS RI PON HER EE 2 General Precautions cis eb ite hath ext b ex EX UE 3 Safety Precautions nsis aria eR RR dp RR RR RR RR RA RUD 4 Operating Environment Precautions 1 5 Application Precautions 2 1 6 EC Directives xii xii xii xiii xiv xvi xi Safety Precautions 1 2 3 xii Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowl edge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement ma chines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the r
219. ion until the minimum cycle time is reached CPU operation will not be paused if the actual cycle time is longer than the minimum cycle time set in DM 6619 A fatal error will occur and PC operation will stop if a maximum cycle time has been set in the PC Setup DM 6618 and the actual cycle time exceeds that set ting The default settings for RS 232C and peripheral port servicing are 596 each of the cycle time but these settings can be changed between 0 and 99 in the PC Setup The RS 232C port s setting is in DM 6616 and the peripheral port s setting is in DM 6617 Refer to Section 7 PC Operations and Processing Time in the Programming Manual W353 for more details and precautions on the cycle time Overseeing processes Main program I H If a minimum cycle time has been Setin DM 6619 CPU operationis paused until the minimum cycle time is reached L refreshing The servicing time can be set RS 232C port servicing in DM 6616 l ining ti 1 Peripheral port servicing 2n lime can bs seli T Sie a ee la 4 17 Section 1 3 Structure and Operation Interrupt Program Execution Z N Caution Immediate Refreshing 18 When an interrupt is generated during execution of the main program main pro gram execution is interrupted immediately and the interrupt program is execut ed The following diagram shows the cyclic operation of the CPM2C
220. itor area Operation Command Variable 1 write data lower bytes Variable 1 write data upper bytes Variable 2 write data lower bytes Variable 2 write data upper bytes Variable 3 write data lower bytes Variable 3 write data upper bytes Variable 4 write data lower bytes Variable 4 write data upper bytes Variable 5 write data lower bytes Variable 5 write data upper bytes Variable 6 write data lower bytes Variable 6 write data upper bytes Variable 7 write data lower bytes Variable 7 write data upper bytes Variable 8 write data lower bytes Variable 8 write data upper bytes Variable 9 write data lower bytes Variable 9 write data upper bytes Variable 10 write data lower bytes Variable 10 write data upper bytes Variable 11 write data lower bytes Variable 11 write data upper bytes Variable 12 write data lower bytes Variable 12 write data upper bytes 279 DM Settings Assignment Sheets Appendix C Read Data Area Host Link Temperature Controllers Contents Command group Response monitor area Present temperature Status Target temperature Alarm 1 SV Alarm 2 SV Proportional band Reset time Derivative time Heater current monitor Heater current status Contents Response monitor area Display value Lower bytes
221. l Me ter s read data area Unit 3 Write Data Area The segment information is 1 and the command group is 1 SYSWAY Response monitor area Contains 0000 when component communications are normal Target temperature 00C8 200 C Operation command See note 0000 Alarm 1 SV See note Set the alarm 1 set value in 2 s complement signed binary format Alarm 2 SV See note Set the alarm 2 set value in 2 s complement signed binary format Proportional band See note Set the proportional band setting in binary Reset time See note Set the reset time setting in binary Derivative time See note Set the derivative time setting in binary Heater burnout detection value See note Set the heater burnout detection value in binary Note It is possible to write just the target temperature by selecting command group 1 When communicating with a Temperature Controller through SYSWAY always allocate 9 words to the write data area even if the selected command group limits 258 Example Application Section 7 9 the number of words actually written Allocate 10 words for a Digital Panel Me ter s write data area 7 9 4 Ladder Program for DM Settings The following diagram shows an example program section used to set the re quired DM values SR 25315 First Cycle Flag HR 0000 0300 DMO0000 DMO0003 Initial DM settings as shown in DM settings tables
222. l Start Code Setting DM 6654 bits 00 to 07 Peripheral Port No protocol End Code Setting or Number of Bytes Received DM 6654 bits 08 to 15 Battery Error Detect Setting 1 6 Preparation for Operation Follow the steps listed below when setting up a CPM2C system 28 1 2 3 1 System Design DM 6655 bits 12 to 15 Not supported Select a CPM2C CPU Unit Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units with the specifications required in the controlled system Design external fail safe circuits such as interlock circuits and limit circuits Refer to 2 1 Specifications and 3 1 Design Precautions for details 2 Installation e Connect the Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units Install the CPU Unit DIN track installation Refer to 3 3 Installing the CPM2C and 3 4 Wiring and Connections for de tails 3 Wiring e Wire the power supply and I O devices e Connect communications devices if necessary Connect the Programming Console Refer to 3 4 Wiring and Connections 4 3 Using a Programming Console for details Changes SW2 Section 1 7 4 Initial Settings Set the Communications Switch on the front of the CPU Unit if necessary The switch must be set when a device other than the Programming sole is connected or the standard communications settings are not used Connect the Programming Console set the mode switch to PROGRAM mode and turn ON the PC e Ch
223. lected None Visual inspection power supply Is the voltage fluctuation measured at the I O terminals within the standard range Each I O terminal must conform to the specifications Tester Installation status Are all units securely installed Nothing is loose Phillips screwdriver Are all connection cables and connectors inserted completely and locked Nothing is loose Visual inspection Are any of the external wiring screws loose Nothing is loose Phillips screwdriver Are any of the external wiring cables frayed No external abnormalities Visual inspection Product service life Contact output relay Electrical Resistance load 150 000 operations Inductive load 100 000 operations Mechanical 20 000 000 operations Battery CPM2C BAT01 Note Power supply voltage range 2 years at 25 C Power supply Allowable voltage fluctuation range 100 to 240 VAC CPM2C PA201 only 85 to 264 VAC 24 VDC 20 4 to 26 4 VDC Required Tools Standard Tools Required Screwdrivers Phillips and flat blade e Voltage tester or digital voltage meter e Industrial alcohol and a cotton cloth Measurement Devices May be Needed e Synchroscope Cathode ray oscilloscope e Thermometer hygrometer Note Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the PC in any way 206 Battery Replacement Section 5 7 5 7 Battery Replacement
224. ler or Digital Panel Meter is connected with the host link SYSWAY only protocol The segment information setting will be invalid in the following cases 1 The communications protocol is set to 02 CompoWay F 2 The communications protocol is set to 00 No Unit connected 3 The communications protocol is set to 01 SYSWAY but the segment information setting is not 1 or 2 Note The command group and segment information settings are valid only when the communications protocol is set to SYSWAY These settings are not valid when the communications protocol is set to CompoWay F The following table shows the data that will be read and written for each com bination of the command group and segment information settings Segment Command group information 1 Temperature Present temperature Controller Status Target temperature Alarm 1 SV Alarm 2 SV Proportional band Reset time Derivative time Heater current Heater current status Target temperature Operation command Alarm 1 SV Alarm 2 SV Proportional band Reset time Derivative time Heater burnout detection value 238 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Segment Command group information 2 Digital Panel Display value Meter Display value status Peak hold Peak hold status Bottom hold Bottom hold status Comparison value HH Comparison value H Comparison value L
225. lidate any changes made in Control Data Area words 7 through 102 After editing these words always switch the Unit from RUN to Stop and then back to RUN again Refer to Simple Communications Unit Control on page 235 for de tails on the RUN Stop Digit The Communications Control Area Read and Write Command Bits and the CompoWay F Read and Write Variable Type Areas are read every cycle so it is not necessary to switch the Unit from Stop to RUN after these areas have been edited When a syntax error occurs in the Simple Communications Unit switch the Unit from RUN to Stop correct the cause of the syntax error and then switch the Unit back to RUN Syntax errors are non fatal errors that are cleared by switching the Unit from RUN to Stop Non fatal errors are not cleared just by eliminating the cause of the error When a DM allocation error occurs it is possible that the DM allocation exceeds the boundary of the CPM2C s DM Area After correcting the DM allocation reset the power supply for the Simple Communications Unit DM allocation errors are fatal errors that are cleared by resetting the power sup ply Fatal errors are not cleared just by eliminating the cause of the error The communications timeout setting must be extended if you are using a system configuration that causes a significant delay in the communications response between the Simple Communications Unit and the components such as wire less communications between the
226. ller Status Contains status read from Temperature Controller Target temperature Contains 0000 The decimal point position has to be managed by the user since the Tempera ture Controller s decimal point position is not transferred in host link X format communications Status Offset 2 and 10 The read data area s 2 offset word contains the status when reading the pres ent temperature The 10 offset word contains the heater current status when reading the heater current Refer to the Temperature Controller s Operation Manual for details on the status values The following data will be read from a Digital Panel Meter when SYSWAY has been specified as the component communications protocol The starting address of the read data area is specified in the control data area Select any one of the 5 command groups to specify which PVs and SVs will be read although 18 DM words will be allocated to the read data area regard less of the command group selected Offset Command group 2 3 Response monitor area Display value Display value status Peak hold Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Command group 4 6 Peak hold status 7 and 8 Bottom hold 9 Bottom hold status 10 and 11 Comparison value HH 12 and 13 Comparison value 14 and 15 Comparison value L 16 and 17 Comparison value LL Note When command
227. llowing Master Units C200HW SRM21 V1 CQM1 SRM21 V1 SRM1 COL I V2 CPM2C S 3 LED Indicators These indicators show the status of CompoBus S communications Indicator Status Meaning Communications in progress Communications error or stopped A communications error has occurred Indicates normal or no communications 4 Expansion I O Connector Input Connects the CompoBus S Link Unit to the CPU Unit or the previous Ex pansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit 5 Expansion I O Connector Output Connects the CompoBus S Link Unit to the next Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit if necessary Up to 5 Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a CPU Unit Only 10 words however can be allo cated for input and output respectively A cover for the expansion I O connector is not included with the Expansion Unit Use the cover included with the CPU Unit to cover the unused expan 69 Unit Components Section 2 2 sion I O connector on the last Expansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit in the PC 6 Locking Lever Used for securing Expansion Units 2 2 6 CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit Front Side 1 RS 422 RS 485 port 4 RS 422 RS 485 switch SW1 6 DM area setting switch 8 2 RS 232C port 8 Connector 5 Communications switch SW3 7 Status indicators Cover o Top
228. long enough b Input indicators will reflect the status of the corresponding inputs even when the is stopped but the corresponding input bits will not be refreshed 6 Output Indicators The output indicators are lit when the corresponding output terminal is ON The indicators are lit during refreshing The status of an output indicator will also reflect the status of the corresponding output when the output is be ing used as a pulse output 7 Communications Port Connects the PC to a Programming Device including Programming Consoles host computer or standard external device Use a proper Con necting Cable CPM2C CN111 CS1W CN114 or CS1W CN118 Note C200H PRO27 E Programming Console can be connected di rectly to the PC with a CS1W CN224 CN624 Connecting Cable 46 Unit Components Section 2 2 b Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable to con nect to the communications port as peripheral port The commu nications port can be used simultaneously both peripheral and RS 232C port by using the CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable c Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable to con nect to the communications port as 232 port The commu nications can be used simultaneously both peripheral and RS 232C by using the CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable 8 Communications Switch The Communications Switch controls the communications settings for the
229. ls on check levels and the errors that may be detected when the program is checked 4 Press the SRCH Key to continue the search The next error will be dis played Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached A display like this will appear if the end of Program Memory is reached spon 00300NO END INST A display like this will appear if an END instruction is reached 00310PROG END 001 00 3KW No more errors exist if the END instruction is displayed If errors are displayed edit the program to correct the errors and check the pro gram again Continue checking the program by pressing the SRCH Key again until all errors have been corrected 4 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor This operation is used to monitor the status of up to 16 bits and words although only 3 can be shown on the display at any one time Operation is possible in any mode 172 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 Program Read then Monitor Bit Monitor Word Monitor 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 Press the MONTR Key to begin monitoring RUN PROGRAM When a program address is being displayed the status of the bit or word in that address can be monitored by pressing the MONTR Key 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the
230. ls on the Support Software that can be used with the CPM2C 136 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 One to N Host Link Connection IBM PC AT or compatible computer Up to 32 OMRON PCs including CPM2C PCs can be connected to a host com puter Connecting Cable 27 2005 2 m 27 5005 5 m When using the port B500 AL004 or 001 requires 5 V See notes 1 and 2 RS 422 Total length 500 m max as a peripheral port CPM2C CIF11 2 CPU Unit CPM2C CPU Unit CPU Unit NT ALOO1 NT ALOO1 V i MS When using E See note 1 See note 1 NT AL001 NT AL001 the port as XW2Z 070T 1 0 7 m See note 1 See note 1 5 232 XW2Z 200T 1 2 070T 070T ort RS 232C port XW2Z 070T 1 0 7 27 070 1 0 7 XW2Z 200T 1 2 22 200 1 2 m CPM2C CPM2C CPM2C RS 232C port CPM2C RS 232C port CPU Unit CPU Unit CPU Unit CPU Unit XW22Z 070T 1 0 7 m 5 CPM2C CN111 CSW1 CN118 Con XW2Z 200T 1 2 m Connecting Cable necting Cable 0 1 m 0 15 CPM2C CIF01 CPM2C CIF21 Up to 32 PCs Note 1 The NT AL001 must be supplied externally with 5 VDC When NT ALOO1 is connected to a CPM2C PC pin 6 of the CPM2C s RS 232C port
231. ls on the Support Soft ware and Programming Console operations 5 2 Self diagnostic Functions The CPM2C is equipped with a variety of self diagnostic functions to help iden tify and correct errors and reduce down time 5 2 1 Identifying Errors Fatal and Non fatal Errors Error Messages Error Flags Error Code NWARNING An error can be identified by the error message displayed on a Programming Device error flags in the AR and SR areas and the error code output to SR 253 PC errors are divided into 2 categories based on the severity of the errors The status of the ERR ALM indicator lit or flashing shows which type of error has occurred ERR ALM Lit Fatal Error Fatal errors are serious errors which stop CPM2C operation There are two ways to restart operation Turn the PC OFF and then ON again Use a Programming Device to switch the PC to PROGRAM mode and read clear the error ERR ALM Flashing Non fatal Error Non fatal errors are less serious errors which don t stop CPM2C operation When an error is detected a corresponding error message will be displayed on the Programming Console or other Programming Device connected to the PC When a hardware error is detected the corresponding error flag in the AR or SR area will be turned ON When an error is detected a specific 2 digit hexadecimal error code is output to SR 25300 to SR 25307 The error code and time of occurrence are also output to the E
232. m configuration and installation of the CPM2C and provides a basic explanation of operating procedures for the Programming Consoles It also introduces the capabilities of the SYSMAC Support Software SSS and SYSMAC CPT Support Software Read this manual first to acquaint yourself with the CPM2C The Programming Manual W353 provides detailed descriptions of the CPM2C s programming func tions The SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals Basics and C series PCs W247 and W248 provide descriptions of SSS operations for the CPM2C and other SYSMAC C series PCs The SYSMAC CPT Support Software Quick Start Guide W332 and User Manual W333 provide descriptions of ladder diagram operations in the Windows environment The CX Programmer User Manual W361 and the Server User Manual W362 provide details of operations for the WS02 CXPC1 E CX Programmer Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the CPM2C Section 1 gives a brief overview of the steps involved in developing of a CPM2C System describes the possible system configurations and describes the CPM2C s special features and functions Section 2 provides the technical specifications of the Units that go together to create a CPM2C PC and describes the main components of the Units Section 3 describes how to install and wire a CPM2C PC Section 4 describes SYSMAC and SYSMAC CPT Support Software cap
233. m memory setting address and reading content Pro gramming Console 166 PROGRAM mode description 149 159 285 Programmable Terminal connections 139 programming checking the program 190 checks for syntax Programming Console 172 errors 196 example 185 inserting and deleting instructions Programming Console 171 172 preparation for 185 procedures 187 searching Programming Console 169 170 setting and reading a memory address Programming Con sole 166 Programming Console connections 134 154 keys 156 models 156 operation errors 196 operations 162 using 154 Programming Devices connections 134 using 143 programs checking check levels 196 downloading 215 entering and editing Programming Console 166 execution in cyclic operation 17 program capacity 35 uploading 214 proximity switches preventing false inputs 109 PT connections 139 pulse control 3 pulse outputs 3 wiring 131 Q S quick response inputs 3 relay outputs connections 107 Relay Terminals connections 96 RS 422 port connection 133 RUN mode description 149 159 search instruction Programming Console 169 170 operands Programming Console 170 self diagnosis functions 36 self holding bit example 187 self diagnostic functions 193 serial communications 138 shock resistance 34 signed decimal data 286 Index modifying Programming Console 180 monitoring 176 177 specifications char
234. m the PC The PVs and status of Temperature Controllers Electronic Timer Counters and Digital Panel Meters can be monitored in the PC s DM area so all of the con nected components can be monitored together Easily Change Component SVs Set values in the connected components can be changed just by changing the corresponding value in the PC s DM area Connect up to 32 Components Components be connected with unit numbers 0 to 31 7 1 2 System Configuration Component Connections The following diagram shows how to connect OMRON components to the 220 CPM2C CPU Unit through the CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit The Simple Communications Unit uses the CPU Unit s peripheral port to transfer data with the connected components Use the Simple Communications Unit s RS 232C port to connect a PT or computer to the CPM2C s CPU Unit RS 422 RS 485 port Simple Commu Unit nications Unit Up to 32 components RS 422 RS 485 E Connect either RS 422 RS 485 Note 1 The CPM2C CIF21 can be used only with the CPM2C 2 Up to 32 OMRON components can be connected Introduction Section 7 1 Supported Components Product Series name name Temperature Temperature Controllers Controllers The following table shows the OMRON components equipped with CompoWay F or SYSWAY communications functions that can be connected to the CPM2C CIF21 Model SYSWAY CompoWay F Comments number Connection Segme
235. made from the menus These settings have to be made by writing data directly to the word containing the setting 4 1 3 Using the SYSMAC CPT Support Software Starting the Software 1 2 3 Note 146 This section shows how to perform basic SYSMAC CPT Support Software op erations with the CPM2C The software is operating in a Windows 95 envi ronment in these examples The SYSMAC CPT Support Software is a Windows 3 1 Windows 98 applica tion Refer to the SYSMAC CPT Support Software User Manual W333 for de tails on computer requirements and the software installation procedure 1 Select Programs P from the Start Menu SYSMAC CPT and then SYSMAC CPT to start the software 2 Read the notes provided in the startup messages and click OK gt lt E 3 SYSMAC CPT Support Software will start To exit from the SYSMAC CPT Support Software select File F from the menu bar and Exit X from the File menu SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 4 1 Creating a New Project Follow this procedure when using SYSMAC CPT Support Software for the first time or creating a new project Specify the PC model and CPU version of the PC being used 1 2 3 1 Select File E from the menu bar and New N from the File menu 2 Input the name of the new project set the PC model to CQM1 set the CPU version to CPU43 and click OK
236. mal value of a word being monitored Binary data modification Changes the status of a word s bits when the word is being monitored Signed decimal data modification Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as signed decimal data within a range of 32 768 to 32 767 The contents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadecimal two s complement format Unsigned decimal data modification Force set reset Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as unsigned decimal data within a range of 0 to 65 535 A change into hexadecimal data is made automatically Forces bits ON force set or OFF force reset 182 Clear force set reset Restores the status of all bits which have been force set of reset 183 Hex ASCII display change 162 Converts word data displays back and forth between 4 digit hexadecimal data and ASCII 183 Programming Console Operations ee Section 4 4 Displaying the cycle time Displays the current average cycle time scan time Reading and setting the clock Reads or sets the internal clock 4 4 2 Clearing Memory All Clear 1 2 3 Z N Caution Partial Clear 1 2 3 This operation is used to clear all or part of the Program Memory and data areas as well as the contents of the Programming Console s memory This operation is possible in PROGRAM mode only MONITOR PROGRAM Before beginni
237. me if a minimum cycle time has been set in the PC Setup DM 6619 Calculate cycle time Read input data from input bits Write output data to output bits Perform RS 232C port communications processing Can be changed in DM 6616 Perform peripheral port communications processing Can be changed in DM 6617 The cycle time can be read from a Programming Device AR 14 contains the maximum cycle time and AR 15 contains the present cycle time in multiples of 0 1 ms 16 Structure and Operation Section 1 3 Program Execution in Cyclic Operation Note Cycle time The cycle time will vary slightly depending on the processing being performed in each cycle so the calculated cycle time will not always match the actual cycle time The following diagram shows the cyclic operation of the CPM2C when the pro gram is being executed normally Normally the results of program execution are transferred to memory just after program execution during I O refreshing but IORF 97 can be used to re fresh a specified range of I O words during program execution The specified range of I O words will be refreshed when IORF 97 is executed The cycle time is the sum of the time required for program execution I O refresh ing and communications port servicing A minimum cycle time 1 to 9 999 ms can be set in the PC Setup DM 6619 When a minimum cycle time has been set CPU operation is paused after pro gram execut
238. mming Console 177 motor control capabilities 3 MSG 46 194 N no protocol communications 138 noise immunity 34 preventing electrical noise 82 85 non fatal errors troubleshooting 201 NPN current output connections 107 NPN open collector connections 107 NT Link connections 139 O operating conditions troubleshooting 204 operating modes 13 operating mode at startup 14 operation preparations 160 output short protection 131 output specifications relay output 40 transistor output 42 output wiring configuration 110 relay output 110 transistor output sinking 113 114 116 117 118 sourcing 113 114 115 116 117 118 P panel installation precautions 81 Programming Console installation 156 password entering on Programming Console 160 PC mode changing 159 PC status indicators 46 Peripheral Devices available models 264 photoelectric switches preventing false inputs 109 platinum resistance thermometer 4 PNP current output connections 107 position control 3 power consumption 34 power cables 85 power interruption detection 14 power supply interrupt time 34 precautions 80 troubleshooting 199 205 wiring 86 Power Supply Unit available models 9 263 components 78 dimensions 269 specifications 44 wiring 87 precautions design precautions 80 general xi output wiring 131 SYSMAC Support Software 152 uploading downloading 210 progra
239. n code 21 in this case E B 00202 021 input the differentiated version of an instruction press the NOT Key after the function code FUN 2 1 NOT The symbol will be displayed next to differentiated instructions Press the NOT Key again to change back the instruction back to a non differentiated instruction The symbol will dis appear To change an instruction after it has been entered simply scroll through the program until the desired instruction is displayed and press the NOT Key The symbol should be displayed next to the instruction Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory The input display for the first operand will be displayed Cc 00202 MOV DATA A Writing Hexadecimal BCD 10 Input the first operand Constant The operands of MOV 21 are normally word addresses but a constant can be input by pressing the CONT Key first When the CONT Key is pressed the display will change to 0000 indicating that a constant can be entered CONT A 00202 MOV DATA A 0100 Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory The input display for the second operand will appear 00202 MOV DATA B WRITE Note The operands of MOV 21 can be word addresses so the CONT Key must be pressed to input a constant e Writing a Word Address 11 Input the second operand
240. n t be changed Switching to Online Operation The SYSMAC CPT Support Software must make an online connection in order to communicate with the CPM2C transfer the program or change the CPM2C s operating mode 1 Select Online O from the menu bar and Go online G from the Online menu 2 A confirmation message will be displayed Click OK to go online 7 IE 149 SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 4 1 3 The ladder diagram display will change to indicate the online connection Changeat to Program showing the PC s operating mode Transferring the Program Use the following procedure to transfer a program to the PC Before attempting to transfer the program make sure that the SYSMAC CPT Support Software is online and that the CPM2C is in PROGRAM mode The pro gram cannot be transferred unless the PC is in PROGRAM mode 1 2 3 1 Check that the PC is in PROGRAM mode select Online from the menu bar and Transfer Computer PC T from the Online menu senec um Hw i LIE RS ET orobect so eurer cn Uns PLC NUM Make sure that the CPM2C is in PROGRAM mode before attempting to transfer the program 2 Select Program and click Transfer Computer PC to begin transfer the program a Select Program aa b Click to begin the program trans
241. n to Program Memory The next program address will be displayed 00201READ WRITE NOP 000 If a mistake was made inputting the instruction press the Up Arrow Key to return to the previous program address and input the instruction again The mistaken instruction will be overwritten To specify the Completion Flag for a timer or counter press the LD AND OR or NOT Key followed by the TIM or CNT Key and then input the timer counter number last Input the second instruction and operand In this case it isn t necessary to enter the timer number because it s 000 Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory p penes 00201 TIM DATA 0000 Input the second operand 123 to specify 12 3 seconds and press the WRITE Key The next program address will be displayed B D 00202READ 1 2 3 E s NOP 000 If a mistake was made inputting the operand press the Up Arrow Key to return to display the mistaken operand and input the operand again Note a Counters are input in the same basic way as timers except the CNT Key is pressed instead of the TIM Key b Timer and counter SVs are input in BCD so it isn t necessary to press the CONT Key 167 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 168 8 Input the third instruction and its operands First input the instruction by pressing the FUN Key and then the functio
242. n value L Upper bytes Comparison value LL Lower bytes Written Written Comparison value LL Upper bytes 281 Numbers 1 1 connections 140 1 N connections 137 A AC Power Supply Unit See Power Supply Unit Adapter Units available models 12 265 components 74 dimensions 270 Adapters available models 265 Analog I O Unit See also Expansion Units available models 263 components 66 dimensions 269 arc killer examples xviii ASCII converting displays Programming Console 183 atmosphere 34 B basic functions 21 battery replacing 207 binary data modifying Programming Console 180 bit status force set reset Programming Console 182 bits searching Programming Console 170 buzzer operation Programming Console 164 cabinet installation precautions 81 Programming Console installation 156 cables available models 263 characteristics 34 check levels program checks 196 checking program syntax Programming Console 172 circuit configuration inputs 37 outputs relay 40 transistor 42 clearing memory areas Programming Console 163 clock reading and setting the clock 184 Index communications capabilities 21 overview 5 errors 195 CompoBus S I O Link 140 CompoBus S I O Link Unit See also Expansion Units available models 263 components 69 dimensions 270 components Adapter Units 74 Analog
243. nal can also be connected by a Host Link connection Ei ther the RS 232C port or peripheral port connection can be used for the Host Link RS 232C port Connecting Cable D sub 9 pin 27 200 2 m 7 XW2Z 500T 5 m CPM2C CPU Unit RS 232C OPEP port Pe RS 232C connection CPM2C CN111 0 15 m Programmable Terminal Dn CS1W CN118 0 1 m RS 422 connection RS 232C lt peripheral port RS 232C port CPM2C CIFO1 RS 422 lt peripheral port 1001 8 RS 232C Adapter RS 232C port XW2Z 070T 1 0 7 m CPMO2C CIF 11 XW2Z 200T 1 2 RS 232C port 2 2 Note The Programmable Terminal cannot be connected using a peripheral port con nection when communicating via an NT Link 139 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 13 One to one PC Link Connections 2 can be linked to another CPM2C a CQM1 1 CPM1A CPM2A SRM1 V2 C200HS or C200HX HE HG PC The PC must be connected using the communications port as an RS 232C port not as a peripheral port 1 1 Link Master RS 232C port D sub 9 pin RS 232C 1 1 Link Slave CPM2C CPU Unit a __ 2 CPU Unit pa D 7
244. nce Dielectric strength 2 300 VAC for 1 min between insulated circuits Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000 4 4 2 kV power lines Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz 0 075 mm double amplitude 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m s in X Y and Z directions for 80 minutes each Time coefficient 8 minutes x coefficient factor 10 total time 80 minutes Shock resistance 147 m s three times each in X Y and Z directions Ambient Operating 0 to 55 C temperature Storage 20 to 75 C except for the battery Humidity 10 to 90 with no condensation Atmosphere Must be free from corrosive gas Power interrupt time 2 ms min 2 1 2 Characteristics CPU Unit Specification 10 I O points 20 I O points 32 I O points relay transistor outputs relay transistor outputs transistor outputs Control method Stored program method control method Cyclic scan with direct output Immediate refreshing can be performed with IORF 97 34 Specifications Section 2 1 CPU Unit Specification 10 I O points relay transistor outputs 20 I O points relay transistor outputs 32 I O points transistor outputs Programming language Ladder diagram Instruction length 1 step per instruction 1 to 5 words per instruction Instructions Basic instructions 14 Special instructions 105 instructions 185 variations Execution time Basic instructions Special instr
245. nction 0001 to 0012 Specify the number of variables that you want to read BCD For example the variables set in variable 1 type and variable 2 type will be read if the number of read items is set to 0002 A syntax error will occur if the number of items specified in this word is not between 0001 and 0012 BCD Reserved Offset 1 Range Function 0000 Always set this word to 0000 Starting Address of Read Data Area Offset 2 Range Function 0000 to 9999 Specifies the starting DM address in the CPU Unit s DM area BCD where the data read from the component will be stored Variable Types Offset 3 5 23 and 25 Use the following equation to calculate the offset for a given variable number Offset 1 2 x variable number Range Function 00 0 to OOCF Sets the type of variable data that you want to read Hex The variable types are predetermined in each component so refer to the component s manual to find the actual variable type A syntax error will occur if the variable type specified in this word is not between 00 0 and OOCF Hex Variable Addresses Offset 4 6 24 and 26 Use the following equation to calculate the offset for a given variable number Offset 2 2 x variable number 0000 to FFFF Sets the variable address of the data that you want to read Hex The variable addresses are predetermined in each component so refer to the component s manual to f
246. nd 2 Input frequency range 10 to 500 Hz 20 Hz to 1 kHz or 300 Hz to 20 kHz Output frequency range 10 Hz to 10 kHz Quick response input 2 inputs in CPU Units with 10 points 4 inputs in CPU Units with 20 32 points Minimum input signal width 50 us Input time constant Determines the input time constant for all inputs Settings 1 2 3 5 10 20 40 or 80 ms Calendar Clock Shows the current year month day of the week day of the month hour minute and second Expansion Unit functions Analog functions using CPM2C MAD11 Analog I O Unit Two analog inputs Input range of 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA One analog output Output range of 1 to 5 V to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Temperature sensing functions using CPM2C TS001 101 Temperature Sensor Unit Thermocouple input measurement range K 200 to 1 300 C 0 0 to 500 0 C J 7100 to 850 C J 0 0 to 400 0 C Platinum resistance thermometer measurement range Pt100 200 0 to 650 0 C JPt100 200 0 to 650 0 C CompoBus S Slave functions using CPM2C SRT21 CompoBus S Link Unit Data exchange with the Master Unit via 8 inputs and 8 outputs Simple communications Note Simple communications functions using the CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit Up to 32 communications components can be connected including communications components suppo
247. nd timer AND NOT TIM LD 4 10 count counter LD 5 Flicker output 10 counts AND NOT OUT 6 END 01 instruction Programming Example Section 4 5 4 5 3 Programming Procedures The example program will be written to the CPM2C according to the mnemonic list in 4 5 2 Example Program The procedure is performed beginning with the initial display Clear the memory before entering a new program Note If an error occurs while inputting the program refer to 5 3 Programming Console Operation Errors for details on correcting the error Refer to the relevant Support Software Operation Manual for details on errors that appear when operating the SSS or SYSMAC CPT Support Software 1 Inputting the Self holding Bit 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 00000 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes 757 00000 LD 00000 00001READ WRITE NOP 000 2 Input the OR condition IR 20000 or A A A A 00001 412 10110 0 10 20000 00002READ WRITE Mere NOP 000 3 Input the normally closed AND condition 000 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes AND 00002 ror on AND NOT 000 EE 00003READ Mere NOP 000 4 Input the OUT instruction IR 20000 our 6 00003 00004READ WRITE Mere NOP 000 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 20000 Jc 00004 HF JL 2 1
248. ng Section 6 3 Operation Procedure CPMI EMUDT VI in Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1 EMU01 V1 before downloading oS Sea et DLS Hera Ses Change the mode of the PC to PRO Wear Mitta Peay thar DELE Confirm the safety of the system Connect the CPM1 EMU01 V1 to the PC s peripheral port Confirm the orientation of the connector before connecting the CPM1 EMU01 V1 PCM TEE ete toe eg ee a Se Pied Note f the indicator is not lit at all lit red or 5 blinks red downloading will not be See the note on possible In this case check the fol the right lowing items Yes Press the DOWNLOAD TO PLC But ton Check if the indicator is blinking green indicating that downloading has started 3 the connector properly con nected Is the EEPROM properly mounted Are the EEPROM specifications cor rect e Are the peripheral port communica tions settings correct See the note above Check if the indicator is lit green indicating that downloading has been successfully completed See the note above Remove the Expansion Memory Unit from the PC r Before actual operation check the contents of the ladder program and the DM area as well as the expansion instruction settings fees AET ec eee See cfe a a
249. ng cables and wiring e Connecting or disconnecting connectors e Replacing the battery 3 1 3 Interlock and Limit Circuits N WARNING Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents The following diagram shows an example of an interlock circuit Interlock Circuit 1 01005 o MC2 Motor forward 01006 MG Motor reverse In the interlock circuit above MC1 and MC2 can t be ON at the same time even if CPM2C outputs 01005 and 01006 are both ON an incorrect PC operation 80 Selecting an Installation Site Section 3 2 3 2 Selecting an Installation Site The 2 is resistant to harsh conditions and highly reliable but installing the PC in a favorable site will maximize its reliability and operating lifetime Z N Caution Be sure to install the CPM2C correctly as outlined in this manual Failure to do so may result in Unit malfunction 3 2 1 Installation Site Conditions Note Do not install the CPM2C under any of the following conditions Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to a temperature below 09 or over 55 C
250. ng to program for the first time or when installing a new program clear all areas The following procedure is used to clear memory completely including the pro gram all data areas counter PVs Data Memory and the PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 1 Bring up the initial display by pressing the CLR Key repeatedly 2 Press the SET NOT and then the RESET Key to begin the operation 00000MEMORY CLR SET HR CNT DM 3 Press the MONTR Key to clear memory completely 00000MEMORY CLR MONTR END HR CNT DM The PC Setup DM 6600 through DM 6655 will be cleared when this operation is performed It is possible to retain the data in specified areas or part of the Program Memory To retain the data in the HR TC or DM Areas press the appropriate key after pressing SET and RESET Any data area that still appears on the display will be cleared when the MONTR Key is pressed The HR Key is used to specify both the AR and HR Areas the CNT Key is used to specify the entire timer counter area and the DM Key is used to specify the DM Area It is also possible to retain a portion of the Program Memory from the first memory address to a specified address After designating the data areas to be retained specify the first Program Memory address to be cleared For example input 030 to leave addresses 000 to 029 untouched but to clear addresses from 030 to the end of Program Memory As an example
251. nit interfaces with the OMRON components by transferring data with SYSWAY or CompoWay F communications Data can be written between the Simple Communications Unit and OMRON components with host link or CompoWay F communications The methods used to read and write data are different in these communications protocol Some components are not limited to just one of these protocols SYSWAY Communications When SYSWAY communications are being used there are 5 possible variable groups Select the variable group of the data that will be transferred Also the type of component being connected Temperature Controller Unit or Digital Panel Meter must be set when using SYSWAY communications Differ ent variables are transferred with Temperature Controller Units and Digital Pan el Meters CompoWay F Communications When CompoWay F communications are being used the variables that will be transferred must be registered beforehand one by one Register the variables that you want to write read in the write variable type area and read variable type area When CompoWay F communications are being used only these registered variables can be written and read Introduction Section 7 1 Data Memory Structure tions through the Simple Communications Unit O 3 Er L 6 L L
252. nnections RS 232C port Signal Outputs signals from the CPU Unit s CMOS conversion interface without conversion Function Host Link no protocol 1 1 Link or 1 1 NT Link connections on 2 1 1 3 Connector Connects to the communications port on the CPU Unit 2 2 8 CPM2C CIF11 RS 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit Front View Right Side mil 1 RS 422 485 port 3 Terminating resistance switch 2 RS 232C port sess 4 RS 485 interface switch 5 Connector tutu 7 202277 Note Do not use the CPM2C CIF11 with any PC other than the 2 75 Unit Components Section 2 2 1 2 3 1 RS422 485 Port Used to connect to host computers or standard external devices Terminal Arrangement RDA Receive data input RDB SDA Send data output SDB NC Note The maximum line length is 500 m 2 RS 232C Port Used to connect to the RS 232C interface of a personal computer or Pro grammable Terminal operator interface Connector Pin Arrangement 5 CTS AE 4 RTS 7 NC pie x 6 5V 1 NC RS 422 485 Connection Example CPM2C CIF11 B500 AL004 Internal Configuration CPM2C CIF11 CPM2C CPU Unit Peripheral port CMOS level RS 422 485 port terminal block RS 232C port RS 232C RS 232C port D sub connector 76 Unit Components Section 2 2 RS 422 485 Signal Converts CMOS level
253. ns port 2 Input terminals 3 Output terminals al eren m S is ul fal Cal Lal al fal a 7 Communications port Top View 10 Battery CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Connector 2 4 Status indicators 6 Output indicators 5 Input indicators 78 Communications switch 9 Customize switch 2 Input connector 3 Output connector CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector amman CPM2G 4 Status indicators 6 Output indicators 5 Input indicators 8 Communications switch 9 Customize switch 2 Input connector 3 Output connector Bottom View 1 Power supply connector 11 Low battery detection switch Right Side CPU Unit with Relay Outputs via Terminal Block CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Connector mill E CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector DIP switch for Units with 10 20 I O points gt ON swi SW2 DIP switch for Units with 32 I O points Sw1i 12 Expansion connector output connector 45 Unit Components Section 2 2 CPU Unit Component Descriptions 1 2 3 1 Power Supply Connector Connect the power supply 24 VDC to this connector 2 Input Terminals Connector Connects the CPU Unit to external input devices 3 Output
254. nt connection info See note 5 OK OK OK OK Digital Controllers Standard Models No No No Digital Controllers Valve Control No Valve system communications are No not supported Digital Controllers Programmable No No No Digital Controllers Programmable Valve Control No No Temperature Controllers No No Fuzzy Temperature Controller No Modular Temperature Controller No OK Timers Electronic Timer Counter No OK Digital Panel Digital Panel Meters Meter No OK Process Meter Limited functions Limited functions Some commands Weighing Meter Limited functions Limited functions Cannot be used Frequency Rate Meter Limited functions Limited functions Only the CompoWay F Period Meter variable area can be Limited functions Limited functions read See note 3 Up Down Counting Meter Limited functions Limited functions Temperature Meter Limited functions Limited functions Intelligent Signal Processor Note Limited functions No SYSWAY connection only See note 2 1 Components that support only host link or CompoWay F communications must be connected with that communications protocol 2 When KSTS is connected connect the other components by SYSWAY as well The K3TS cannot be combined with components that communica
255. ntains the alarm 1 set value in 2 s complement signed binary format Alarm 2 SV See note Contains the alarm 2 set value in 2 s complement signed binary format Proportional band See note Contains the proportional band setting in binary Reset time See note Contains the reset time setting in binary Derivative time See note Contains the derivative time setting in binary Heater current monitor See note Contains the heater s electrical current in binary Heater current status See note Contains the status when the heater s electrical current was read Note The entire Unit 2 read data area is refreshed even though command group 1 is selected and only the values in DM 0200 to DM 0202 are read from the compo nent The contents of DM 0204 to DM 0210 are cleared to 0000 When communicating with a Temperature Controller through SYSWAY always allocate 11 words to the read data area even if the selected command group lim its the number of words actually read Allocate 18 words for a Digital Panel Me ter s read data area Unit 2 Write Data Area The segment information is 1 and the command group is 1 SYSWAY Allocate words DM 0220 through DM 0228 to the Unit 2 write data area In this example data isn t written to Unit 2 so it isn t necessary to set data in the Unit 2 write data area 257 Example Application Section 7 9 Unit 3 Read Data Area The segment informati
256. nter 1 Input the normally open condition IR 20000 00010 LD 20000 00011 READ NOP 000 2 Input the normally open AND condition 001 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes AND B TIM WRITE 188 00011 AND 001 00012READ NOP 000 Programming Example 4 5 3 Input the normally closed condition IR 20000 LD A ae 2 00012 LDNOT 20000 WRITE 00013READ NOP 000 4 Input the counter 000 A 00013 CNT 000 WRITE 00013 CNT DATA 0000 5 Input the SV for counter 000 0010 10 counts B A 00013 CNT DATA 0010 WRITE 5 Inputting the Flicker Output 00014READ NOP 000 1 2 3 1 Input the normally open condition IR 20000 LD E 000014 LD 20000 00015READ NOP 000 2 Input the normally closed AND condition 001 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes AND B NOT WRITE 3 Input the OUT instruction 00015 AND NOT TIM 001 00016READ NOP 000 IR 01000 It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes B A A A Ye 00016 OUT 01000 00017READ NOP 000 6 Inputting the END 001 Input END 01 The display shows three digits in the function code but only the Instruction A B 0 1 WRITE last two digits are
257. o remove it 84 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 3 4 Wiring and Connections This section provides basic information on wiring the Power Supply Unit and Ex pansion I O Units and on connecting Programming Devices 3 4 1 General Precautions for Wiring N Caution Line Noise Leave the protective label in place while wiring The Unit may malfunction if strands of wire get inside the Unit After completing wiring be sure to remove the label to avoid overheating Protective label Do not run CPM2C I O lines in the same duct or conduit as power lines Hanging Ducts Leave at least 300 mm between the power cables and the or control wiring as shown in the following diagram CPM2C lines 300 mm min Control cables and CPM2C power lines 300 mm min Power cables Floor Ducts Leave at least 200 mm between the wiring and the top of the duct as shown in the following diagram Control cables and CPM2C I O lines CPM2C power lines Power cables E Metal plate iron 200 mm min 85 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Conduits Separate the CPM2C lines power and control lines and power cables as shown in the following diagram Control cables and 2 I O lines CPM2C power lines Power cables 3 4 2 Power Supply Wiring The following procedure explains how to connect the CPU Unit to the AC Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 with the power suppl
258. o DM 0268 The following settings are used for the RS 485 communications Data bits 7 bits Parity Even Stop bits 7 9 2 System Preparation 2 bits Refer to Section 3 Installation and Wiring and make the following preparations 1 2 3 1 Connect the Units 2 Set switches 254 Example Application Section 7 9 3 Make required settings in the PC 4 Make required settings in the components 7 9 3 DM Settings and Component Communications The following tables show the DM settings for this example Words are shown in bold if they contain required settings Other words are generally used to monitor operation Control Data Area Bit s Function Setting RUN Stop command Communications timeout setting Number of connected components Simple Communications Unit status Syntax Error DM Address Read Write Command Bits for Units 7 to 4 Unit 3 Read Command Bit Unit 3 Write Command Bit 10 Unit 2 Read Command Bit 11 Unit 2 Write Command Bit 12 Unit 1 Read Command Bit 13 Unit 1 Write Command Bit 14 Unit 0 Read Command Bit 15 Unit 0 Write Command Bit 0to 15 Read Write Command Bits for Units 15 to 8 Oto 15 Read Write Command Bits for Units 23 to 16 Oto 15 Read Write Command Bits for Units 31 to 24 0 to 7 Unit 0 Communications protocol 8to 11 Unit 0 Command group 12to 15 Unit 0 Segment information 0to15 Starting address of Unit 0 read variable type area 0to15 Starting address of
259. oading Programs 6 3 4 Downloading Programs 210 210 210 211 211 211 212 212 213 214 215 209 Overview Section 6 1 6 1 Overview The CPM1 EMU01 V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for small size or micro PCs Using the CPM1 EMU01 V1 simple on site transfer of user programs and data memory between PCs is possible Downloading Sea co 2 111 2 CS1W CN114 CPM2C Expansion Memory Unit CPM2C CIFO1 Note The PLC in the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button indicates PCs Programmable Controllers 6 1 1 Memory Areas The memory areas that are uploaded or downloaded vary with the button used as shown in the following table NL EN UPLOAD DM UPLOAD DOWNLOAD TO PLC Ladder program Read from PC to Read from PC to All contents of and expansion EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM written instructions to PC DM 6144 to 6655 Not affected Note For details on program size DM area and the availability of expansion instruc tions refer to the relevant PC manual 6 1 2 Precautions e Do not attempt to use the CPM1 EMU01 V1 for any applications other than those described here Doing so may result in malfunction Do not attempt to upload or download data between different types of PC Do ing so may result in malfunction Do not download when
260. of Unit 14 read data area Starting address of Unit 14 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 14 write data area Starting address of Unit 14 write variable type area Unit 15 communications type 275 DM Settings Assignment Sheets Contents Starting address of Unit 15 read data area Starting address of Unit 15 read variable type area Appendix C Starting address of Unit 15 write data area Starting address of Unit 15 write variable type area Unit 16 communications type Starting address of Unit 16 read data area Starting address of Unit 16 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 16 write data area Starting address of Unit 16 write variable type area Unit 17 communications type Starting address of Unit 17 read data area Starting address of Unit 17 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 17 write data area Starting address of Unit 17 write variable type area Unit 18 communications type Starting address of Unit 18 read data area Starting address of Unit 18 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 18 write data area Starting address of Unit 18 write variable type area Unit 19 communications type Starting address of Unit 19 read data area Starting address of Unit 19 read variable type
261. ogram Memory Program Transfer Expansion Instructions DM Area addresses not supported by the CPM2C cannot be transferred or mon itored DM 1024 to DM 6148 are not checked for DM Area verification Since the program capacity of the CQM1 7 200 words is greater than that of the 2 4 096 words the display will show more free space than is actually available Be sure to keep the actual program capacity in mind while program ming When the program is transferred from the PC to the SSS with the default function code assignments FUN18 19 87 and 88 will be displayed as TKY MCMP DSW and 7SEG The instructions however will be transferred correctly 222 will be displayed if any instructions not supported by the SSS are trans ferred from the CPM2C Mnemonics will be displayed however if any have been defined for the specified function code When the program is transferred from the SSS to the PC TKY MCMP DSW and 7SEG will be displayed on the SSS but will not be executed in the CPU Unit They will be treated as NOP If expansion instructions are transferred to the PC with DM 6602 is set to the de fault settings a message saying that expansion instructions cannot be written because DIP switch pin 4 is OFF will be displayed Change the setting of DM 6602 to enable user settings to use expansion instructions If instructions not supported by the CPM2C are transferred to the PC a message saying to
262. ol word Offset 0 is set to 00 2 The setting in the Simple Communications Unit Control word Offset 0 is set to 00 3 No Unit connected is set in the Units Communications Type word 8 to 11 Run Stop This flag will be ON when the Simple Communications Unit is Digit 162 flag running and OFF when it is stopped 12 to 15 Error flag A value of 0 bit 15 OFF indicates that a fatal error has not Digit 163 occurred in the Simple Communications Unit The Unit will not be able to notify the CPU Unit that a fatal error has occurred in the following cases 1 The CPU Unit is in RUN mode and DM cannot be written 2 An error occurred in communications with the CPU Unit 3 Program memory is write protected in the PC Setup DM 6602 4 Afatal error occurred in the CPU Unit When one of these 4 errors error occurs the Simple Communications Unit will stop all communications and light the ERR indicator Syntax Error DM address Offset 2 0000 to 9999 The Simple Communications Unit indicates the DM address where the syntax error occurred BCD When two or more syntax errors have been detected the Unit will indicate the DM address that was detected first 236 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Communications Control Bits Offset 3 4 5 and 6 Offset 3 Units 0 to 7 Unit 7 Read Command Bit Offset 4 Units 8 to 15 Unit 15 Read Command Bit Offs
263. ollowing flowcharts to troubleshoot errors that occur during operation Main Check PWR indicator lit no Check power supply See page 199 Yes RUN indicator lit No Operation stopped Check for fatal errors See page 200 Yes ERR ALM indicator Flashing flashing Check for non fatal errors See page 201 Not lit No Is 3 poros dd Check See page 202 Yes Operating No environment normal Check operating environment See page 204 Yes Replace the CPU Unit 198 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 5 5 Power Supply Check Connect power supply Is power being supplied Yes Is PWR indicator lit Is voltage adequate No Set supply voltage within acceptable limits Yes No s PWR indicator lit 7 gt gt 768 Are there any discon Connect connectors nected connectors or or replace wires broken wires Yes Is PWR indicator lit Replace the CPU End Unit 199 Troubleshooting Flowcharts Section 5 5 Fatal Error Check 200 RUN indicator not lit Is the ERR ALM indicator lit Determine the cause of the error with a Programming Device Is PC mode displayed on Programming Device Is PC mode displayed on Programming Device Turn the power supply OFF and then ON again Is a fatal error m displayed Identify the error eliminate
264. ompleted or set the write mode for the Temperature Controller to RAM write mode 237 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Unit Communications Type Offset 7 10 13 97 and 100 Use the following equation to calculate the offset for a given unit number Offset 7 3 x unit number Setting Function 0to7 Communications Specifies the communications protocol SYSWAY or CompoWay F of the Digits 16 protocol connected component if a component is connected and 16 00 No Unit connected 01 SYSWAY 02 CompoWay F A syntax error will occur and this word s settings will be invalid if a value other than 00 01 or 02 is specified 8 10 11 Command group This setting is valid only when SYSWAY 01 is specified for the Digit 162 valid with host communications protocol When SYSWAY is specified the command group link only determines which values are read written when reading or writing data The command group setting will be invalid in the following cases 1 The communications protocol is set to 02 CompoWay F 2 The communications protocol is set to 00 No Unit connected 3 The communications protocol is set to 01 SYSWAY but the command group setting is not within the allowed range 1 to 5 12 to 15 Segment This setting is valid only when host link 01 is specified for the Digit 163 information communications protocol The segment information specifies whether a valid with Temperature Control
265. on s end code is a value other than 00 the response monitor area contains the end code error code The value of FF in the first two digits indicates that an error occurred during transmis sion of the CompoWay F command Error code Meaning Address overflow Could not execute command Parity error Framing error Overrun error BCC error Format error Numeric data error Sub address error 244 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Error code Meaning Frame length error Non volatile memory write error Response data BCC error 3 Timeout error occurred Timeout code Meaning E999 Indicates that there was no response from the component Operation Command Offset 1 Refer to the component s Operation Manual for details on the command codes for the various CompoWay F communications functions Bits Function 0107 Related information Digits 160 and 161 Set any related information required by the CompoWay F command code as described in the component s manual 8 to 15 Command code Digits 162 and 163 Set the CompoWay F command code as described in the component s manual Note SVs cannot be written in a cycle in which start auto tuning has been specified Write Data Offset 2 4 22 and 24 The write data is contained in two words starting at offset 2 x n n variable num ber Offset Function 2xn 0000 to FFFF Store the
266. on It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired words according to the procedure de scribed 4 4 15 Three Word Monitor D0002D0001D0000 0123 4567 89AB Three word monitor 177 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 Note 2 Press the CHG Key to begin 3 word data modification The cursor will ap pear next to the contents of the leftmost word D0002 3CH CHG 0123 4567 89AB 3 Input the new value for the leftmost word on the display and press the CHG Key if more changes will be made Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if no more changes will be made B ie D0002 3CH CHG 24 4567998 4 Input the new value for the middle word on the display and press the CHG Key if the rightmost word will be changed Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if the rightmost word will not be 55 In this case it will not ware D0002D0001 D0000 0001 0234 89AB If the CLR
267. on codes INST TBL READ FUNO18 FUN 4 Press the CHG Key to assign a different expansion instruction to the selec ted function code me INST TBL CHG FUNO18 FUN 5 Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the expansion instruc tions that can be assigned to the selected function code INST TBL CHG FUNO18 FUN HEX 165 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 6 Press the WRITE Key to assign the displayed instruction to the function code INST TBL READ wae FUNO18 HEX 4 4 6 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring l O Bit Status 1 2 3 This operation is used to display the specified program memory address and is possible any mode In the RUN or MONITOR mode the bit status of bits in the program will be displayed RUN MONTOR PROGRAM When inputting a program for the first time it is generally written to Program Memory starting from address 000 Because this address appears when the display is cleared it is not necessary to specify it When inputting a program starting from other than 000 or to read or modify a program that already exists in memory the desired address must be desig nated 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the desired address It is not necessary to input leading zeroes C A A 00200 3 Press the Down Arrow Key 00200READ OFF
268. on is 1 and the command group is 1 SYSWAY Response monitor area Contains 0000 when component communications are normal Present temperature Contains the PV in 2 s complement signed binary format Status Contains the status when the PV was read Target temperature See note Contains the target temperature in 2 s complement signed binary format Alarm 1 SV See note Contains the alarm 1 set value in 2 s complement signed binary format Alarm 2 SV See note Contains the alarm 2 set value in 2 s complement signed binary format Proportional band See note Contains the proportional band setting in binary Reset time See note Contains the reset time setting in binary Derivative time See note Contains the derivative time setting in binary Heater current monitor See note Contains the heater s electrical current in binary Heater current status See note Contains the status when the heater s electrical current was read Note The entire Unit 3 read data area is refreshed even though command group 1 is selected and only the values in DM 0240 to DM 0242 are read from the compo nent The contents of DM 0244 to DM 0250 are cleared to 0000 When communicating with a Temperature Controller through SYSWAY always allocate 11 words to the read data area even if the selected command group lim its the number of words actually read Allocate 18 words for a Digital Pane
269. onsole Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port Connect a personal computer running SYSMAC Support Software SSS or SYSMAC CPT Support Software The computer can be connected to the peripheral port or RS 232C port Monitor equipment with a Programmable Terminal and program the PC with a Programming Device The RS 232C port and peripheral port can be used simultaneously via the communications port 1 5 Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A Instruction set Basic instructions 14 Same as 2 Same as 2 Special instructions 105 instructions 185 variations Same as 2 79 instructions 139 variations Instruction Basic instructions LD 0 64 us Same as 2 LD 1 72 us execution times Special instructions MOV 21 7 8 us Same as 2 MOV 21 16 3 us Program capacity 4 096 words Same 2 2 048 words number of I O Stand alone CPU Unit 10 20 or 32 points 30 40 or 60 points 10 20 30 or 40 points points CPU Unit with Expansion Units 170 180 or 192 points max 90 100 or 120 points max 90 or 100 points max Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units Maximum number of Units A maximum of 5 Units can be connected to any of the CPU Units A maximum of 3 Units can be connected to any of the CPU Units A maximum o
270. operation continue if voltage is continue if voltage is restored in this region restored in this region Note If the power supply voltage fluctuates around 85 of the PC s rated voltage PC operation may stop and restart repeatedly When repeated stopping and starting will cause problems with the controlled system set up a protective circuit such as a circuit that shuts OFF the power supply to sensitive equipment until the power supply voltage returns to the rated value 15 Structure and Operation Section 1 3 1 3 5 Cyclic Operation and Interrupts Basic CPU Operation Initialization processing is performed when the power is turned ON If there are no initialization errors the overseeing processes program execution re freshing and communications port servicing are performed repeatedly cyclical ly Startup initialization PC cycle time iu Overseeing processes Program execution Cycle time calculation refreshing RS 232C port servicing Peripheral port servicing Check hardware Check memory Read data from flash memory program read only DM data and PC Setup settings Check for battery error Preset the watch maximum cycle time Check program memory Refresh bits for expansion functions Execute the program Refer to the Programming Manual W353 for details on cycle time and I O response times Wait for minimum cycle ti
271. or until it securely locks into place e Connections are not possible to the RS 232C port or any other port PERIPHERAL The peripheral port must be set to the default communications settings shown below Start bits 1 Data bits 7 Stop bits 2 Parity Even Baud rate 9 600 bps 213 Handling Section 6 3 Disconnecting Press the levers on the top and bottom of the connector inwards to unlock the connector and pull out as shown in the following diagram i t Note Do not attempt to remove the connector by pulling the cable 6 3 3 Uploading Programs Ladder programs and the contents of data memory can be uploaded to the EEPROM using the following procedure The buttons used will determine whether the contents of data memory are uploaded or not CPM2C f CPM2C CN111 4 CS1W CN114 EEPROM EMUO 1 UP DOWNLOADER Indicator UPLOAD DM Button UPLOAD Button CPM2C CIFO1 But _ UPLOAD DW UPLOAD Ladder program and Read from PC to Read from PC to expansion instructions EEPROM EEPROM DM6144 to 6655 Not affected Note Use a Phillips screwdriver or other tool with a diameter of 3 0 mm max anda blade length of 10 mm min to press the upload button Uploading is possible even if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 214 Handling Section 6 3 Operation Procedure Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1 EMU01 V1
272. ors The following tables provide specifications of compatible I O connectors connectors 90 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 Compatible Connector Specifications OMRON Connector 24 pin soldered connector and cover Specifications Connector Fujitsu FCN 361J024 AU equivalent Cover Fujitsu FCN 360C024 J2 equivalent Model number C500 CE241 24 pin crimp connector and cover Housing Fujitsu FCN 363J024 equivalent Contacts Fujitsu FCN 363J AU equivalent Cover Fujitsu FCN 360C024 J2 equivalent C500 CE242 24 pin pressure connector Connector Specifications Fujitsu Soldered jack Connector Fujitsu FCN 367J024 AU F equivalent Specifications 24 pin gold plated terminals C500 CE243 Model number FCN 361J024 AU Crimp Crimp jack housing 24 pin FCN 363J024 connector Crimp contacts For wire gauges 24 AWG to 28 AWG FCN 363J AU Hand crimp tool FCN 363T T005 H Contact removal tool FCN 360T T001 H Pressure connector Pressure jack with closed end cover 24 pin gold plated terminals FCN 367J024 AU F 24 pin silver plated terminals FCN 367J024 AG F Pressure jack with open end cover 24 pin gold plated terminals FCN 367J024 AU H 24 pin silver plated terminals FCN 367J024 AG H Pressing tools Hand press General purpose FCN 707T T101 H Cable cutter General purpose FCN 707T T0
273. ote COM terminals 3 and 4 are connected internally 103 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Expansion I O Units with 8 Input Points CPM2C 8EDM Input devices 00 o 20 00001 18 0 56 0002 lt 00103 7 00704 gt 00005 55 0006 8 55 00107 mH _ 4 EA 24 VDC m Expansion Units with 16 Input Points CPM2C 16EDM Inputs IR word m Input devices 001300 nput devices od 00 Note COM terminals 3 and 4 are connected internally Wiring Input Terminals The wiring for input terminals is as shown below Terminal Blocks XW2B 20G4 XW2B 20G5 Connecting Cable XW2Z Connecting Cable G79 104 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Terminal Blocks XW2D 20G6 Connecting Cable XW2Z Connecting Cable G79 1C G79 O
274. patible Programming Consoles 156 4 3 3 Changing the CPM2C s Mode with the Mode Switch 159 4 3 4 Preparation for Operation 160 4 3 5 Entering the Password da e kr 160 4 4 Programming Console Operations 162 4 41 QVerVIeW be dah a dh RED Ei RS E 162 4 4 2 Clearing 163 4 43 Reading Clearing Error Messages 164 4 4 4 Buzzer Operation eke ws Ce 164 4 4 5 Assigning Expansion Instruction Function 165 4 4 6 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring I O Bit Status 166 4 4 7 Entering or Editing Programs 166 4 4 8 Instruction search cese dee eee ee ee eg 169 4 49 Bit Operand Search 2 2 170 4 4 10 Inserting and Deleting Instructions 171 4 4 11 Checking the Program 7 172 4 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor 172 4 4 13 Differentiation Monitor 174 4 4 14 Binary Monitor ossei REDE a RERO ae E RUE E 175 4 4 15 Three Wo
275. pecified words Overseeing processes Main program IORF 97 executed Cycle time Immediate refreshing refreshing refreshing RS 232C port servicing Peripheral port servicing 1 4 Functions Listed by Usage Machine Control Functions Function Receive high speed Max count frequency of 2 kHz Use interrupt input counter mode to count inputs single phase read the present value without For example calculating interrupts length or position with Max count frequency of 5 kHz differential Use high speed counter to read the encoder phase or 20 kHz single phase present value without interrupts Generate a pulse output based on a multiple of an input pulse to Pulse synchronization synchronize control of a peripheral process with the main process The multiple for the peripheral process such as tool feed rate can be changed during operation by calculating the multiple from another input value such as an encoder in the peripheral process This method can be used to change the process for different products or models without stopping the equipment Reliably receive input pulses with an ON time shorter than the cycle Quick response input function time such as inputs from a photomicrosensor 19 Functions Listed by Usage Section 1 4 Usage Function Refer to Interrupt functions Execute a special proces
276. perating Modes PROGRAM Mode MONITOR Mode RUN Mode Caution 2 CPU Units have 3 operating modes PROGRAM MONITOR and RUN The program cannot be executed in PROGRAM mode This mode is used to perform the following operations in preparation for program execution Changing initial operating parameters such as those in the PC Setup e Writing transferring or checking the program e Checking wiring by force setting and force resetting bits The PC continues to refresh bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expan sion I O Units may operate unexpectedly if the corresponding output bit is turned ON by changing the contents of I O memory The program is executed in MONITOR mode and the following operations can be performed from a Programming Device In general MONITOR mode is used to debug the program test operation and make adjustments e Online editing Monitoring memory during operation Force setting force resetting bits changing set values and changing pres ent values during operation The program is executed at normal speed in RUN mode Operations such as online editing force setting force resetting bits and changing set values present values cannot be performed in RUN mode but the status of I O bits can be monitored 13 Structure and Operation Section 1 3 1 3 3 Operating Mode at Startup Not
277. pond to Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Using Pulse Outputs The following diagrams show example applications of sink type transistor out puts using output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001 Use the PULS 65 SPED ACC PWM SYNC instructions to produce pulse outputs rath er than normal outputs from output bits IR 01000 and IR 01001 Single phase pulse output Single phase pulse output Fixed duty ratio Variable duty ratio CPM2C CPM2C Relay Motor driver Pulse output 0 01000 Pulse output 0 01000 Motor driver Pulse output 1 Pulse output 1 01001 01001 COM COM 24 24 Pulse plus direction output Increment pulse output CPM2C Motor driver CPM2C Motor driver Pulse output 0 01000 CW pulse output 01000 Direction output Q Direction input CCW pulse output 01001 Note CW is clockwise and CCW is counter clockwise Output Wiring Observe the following precautions to protect the PC s internal components Precautions Output Short Protection The output or internal circuitry might be damaged when the load connected to an output is short circuited so it is recommended to install a protective fuse in each output circuit 131 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 132 Inductive Loads When connecting an inductive load to an input connect a surge protector or diode in parallel with the load The surge
278. ponse monitor area Contains 0000 when component communications are normal Status The component s status is read to this word Variable 1 read data lower bytes Variable 1 read data upper bytes Note The Temperature Controller s PV is read to DM 0172 and DM 0173 because the Unit O read variable type area specified the PV Unit 0 Write Data Area Function Setting Compoway F Response monitor area Contains 0000 when communications with the component are normal Operation Command command code Operation Command related information Variable 1 write data lower bytes Variable 1 write data upper bytes Note 1 The operation command is set to 0000 disabled in the Unit O write variable type area so the command code and related information are not used 2 Sets the hexadecimal equivalent of the target temperature 100 C which is the variable that was registered in the Unit O write variable type area 256 Example Application Section 7 9 Unit 2 Read Data Area The segment information is 1 and the command group is 1 SYSWAY Response monitor area Contains 0000 when component communications are normal Present temperature Contains the PV in 2 s complement signed binary format Status Contains the status when the PV was read Target temperature See note Contains the target temperature in 2 s complement signed binary format Alarm 1 SV See note Co
279. port with an XW2Z have a D sub 25 pin connector and the XW2Z 005 or XW2Z 9 pin connector IBM PC AT or compatible computer Connecting Cable XW2Z 200S V 2 m XW2Z 500S V 5 m Cait 00S V Connecting Cable XW2Z CPM2C CN111 0 15 m CS1W CN118 0 1 m CPM2C CIF01 CPM2C CIF 11 CPM2C CIF21 00S Cables 00S V Cables have a D sub 135 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Peripheral Port Connection A personal computer can be connected to the CPU Unit s communications port through a CQM1 CIFO2 RS 232C Adapter 1 02 RS 232C Adapter has a 9 pin connector Peripheral port IBM PC AT or 1 02 3 3m CPM2C CPU Unit compatible 4 z computer CPM2C CN111 0 15 m _ A CS1W CN114 0 05 m CPM2C CIFO1 Note 1 The CS1W CN226 626 Connecting Cables be used but the CS1W CN225 625 and CS1W CN227 627 Connecting Cables cannot be used 2 The CQM1 CIF11 Connecting Cable cannot be used If one is connected the CPM2C will not recognize it and for this reason the PC will enter RUN mode at startup if the PC Setup DM 6600 is at the default settings i e the startup mode depends on whether or not a Programming Device is con nected 3 Refer to Section 4 Using Programming Devices for detai
280. r should not be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number To clear an FAL error correct the cause of the error and then execute FAL 00 or use a Programming Device to clear the error SEVERE FAILURE ALARM 15 07 is an instruction that causes a fatal error The following will occur when FALS 07 an FALS 07 instruction is executed 1 2 3 1 Program execution will be stopped and all outputs will be turned OFF 2 The ERR ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will be lit 3 The instruction s 2 digit BCD FALS number 01 to 99 will be written to SR 25300 to SR 25307 The FALS numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions but the same number should not be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number To clear an FALS error use a Programming Device to switch the PC to PRO GRAM Mode correct the cause of the error and then clear the error MESSAGE MSG 46 MSG 46 is used to display a message on a Programming Device connected to the CPM2C The message which can be up to 16 characters long is displayed when the instruction s execution condition is ON 5 2 3 Non fatal Errors PC operation and program execution will continue after one or more of these errors have occurred Although PC operation will continue the cause of the error should be corrected and the error cleared as soon as possible When one of these errors occurs the POWER and RUN indicators will remain lit and the ERR ALM indicator will flash Messag
281. ranges Storage temperature 20 to 75 C storage humidity 1096 to 9096 with no icing or condensation When using a thermocouple input Temperature Sensor Unit do not touch the cold junction compensator Doing so may result in incorrect temperature mea surement 6 EC Directives 6 1 Applicable Directives Directives Low Voltage Directive 6 2 Concepts EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards see the following note Whether the products conform to the stan dards in the system used by the customer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc tives will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed The cus tomer must therefore perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards Note Applicable EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility standards are as follows EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility 61131 2 EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN50081 2 Radiated emission 10 m regulations Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1 000 VAC and 75 to 1 500 VDC
282. rch will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached In this case an END instruction was reached at address 397 Indicates the address of END instruction ERU 00397SRCH END 001 00 4KW Indicates the amount used by the user program in units of 0 1 Kwords 4 4 9 Bit Operand Search This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified operand bit in the pro gram and is possible in any mode PROGRAM ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is RUN MONITOR mode 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Input the operand address It is not necessary to input leading zeroes ma CONT F 00000CONT SRCH s um LD 00005 3 Press the SRCH Key to begin the search 00123CONT SRCH SRCH LD 00005 4 Press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the operand bit NS 00255CONT SRCH AND 00005 5 search will continue until END instruction or the end of Program Memory is reached In this case an END instruction was reached Indicates the address of END instruction 2 2 00397 SRCH END 001 00 4KW Indicates the amount used by the user program in units of 0 1 Kwords 170 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 4 4 10 Inserting and Deleting Instructions This oper
283. rd Monitor 176 4 4 16 Signed Decimal Monitor 176 4 4 17 Unsigned Decimal Monitor 177 4 4 18 Three Word Data Modification 177 4 4 19 Changing Timer Counter SV 178 4 4 20 Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification 179 4 4 21 Binary Data Modification 180 4 4 22 Signed Decimal Data Modification 180 4 4 23 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification 181 4 4 24 Force Set Reset 182 4 4 25 Clear Force Set Reset suse HER WERE DE C 183 4 4 26 Hex ASCII Display Change 183 4 4 27 Displaying the Cycle Time 184 4 4 28 Reading and Setting the 184 4 5 Programming 1 2 2 185 4 5 1 Preparatory Operations 222222222222 185 4 5 2 Example Programs c eae ee hag epee bh e ag abs SHER OS 186 4 5 3 Programming 187 4 5 4 Checking the Program
284. rite variable type area DM Settings Assignment Sheets Appendix C Read Variable Type Area CompoWay F Contents Variable name Setting range Number of read items 0001 to 0012 BCD Reserved Always 0000 Starting address of read data area 0000 to 9999 BCD Variable 1 type Variable type Variable 1 address 00 0 to Hex Variable 2 type Variable address Variable 2 address 0000 to FFFF Hex Variable 3 type Variable 3 address Variable 4 type Variable 4 address Variable 5 type Variable 5 address Variable 6 type Variable 6 address Variable 7 type Variable 7 address Variable 8 type Variable 8 address Variable 9 type Variable 9 address Variable 10 type Variable 10 address Variable 11 type Variable 11 address Variable 12 type Variable 12 address 277 DM Settings Assignment Sheets Appendix C Write Variable Type Area CompoWay F Contents Variable name Setting range Number of write items 0000 to 0012 BCD Operation Command 0000 None 0001 Command set Starting address of write data area 0000 to 9999 BCD Variable 1 type Variable type Variable 1 address 00 0 to OOCF Hex Variable 2 t Variable address 0000 to FFFF Hex Variable 2 address Variable 3 type Variable 3 address Variable 4 type Variable 4 address Variable 5 type Variable 5 address Variable 6 type Variable 6 addr
285. rogramming Console 164 user defined errors 194 Expansion I O Units available models 10 262 components 56 connections 82 dimensions 268 general specifications 34 input specifications 39 expansion instructions 153 reading and changing function code assignments 165 Expansion Memory Unit 209 connections 213 Expansion Units available models 11 263 components 66 connections 82 dimensions 269 specifications 34 F FAL numbers 194 FAL 06 194 FALS numbers 195 FALS 07 194 false inputs 109 fatal errors troubleshooting 200 features 2 flash memory precautions 192 284 flicker output example 189 force set reset clearing Programming Console 183 Programming Console 182 function codes reading and changing expansion instruction assignments 165 functions 6 comparison 21 hexadecimal data converting displays Programming Console 183 humidity 34 capacity 35 T O connectors available models 262 pin allocation CPU Units 48 Expansion I O Units 58 wiring 90 1 0 errors troubleshooting 202 I O line noise preventing 85 refreshing immediate refreshing 18 T O terminals allocation CPU Units 48 Expansion I O Units 58 immediate refreshing 18 indicators CompoBus S LED indicators 69 flashing ERR ALM indicator 194 lit ERR ALM indicator 195 PC status indicators 46 inductive loads 110 132 initialization time required 14 input devices conn
286. rror Log Area DM 2000 to DM 2021 Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents 193 Self diagnostic Functions Section 5 2 NWARNING The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents 5 2 2 User defined Errors There are three instructions that can be used to define errors or messages FAL 06 causes a non fatal error FAL 07 causes a fatal error and MSG 46 sends a message to the Programming Console or host computer connected to the PC FAILURE ALARM FAL 06 is an instruction that causes a non fatal error The following will occur FAL 06 when an FAL 06 instruction is executed 1 2 3 1 The ERR ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash PC operation will con tinue 2 The instruction s 2 digit BCD FAL number 01 to 99 will be written to SR 25300 to SR 25307 The FAL numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions but the same numbe
287. rting address of Unit 7 write data area Starting address of Unit 7 write variable type area Unit 8 communications type Starting address of Unit 8 read data area Starting address of Unit 8 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 8 write data area Starting address of Unit 8 write variable type area Unit 9 communications type Starting address of Unit 9 read data area Starting address of Unit 9 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 9 write data area Starting address of Unit 9 write variable type area Unit 10 communications type Starting address of Unit 10 read data area Starting address of Unit 10 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 10 write data area Starting address of Unit 10 write variable type area Unit 11 communications type Starting address of Unit 11 read data area Starting address of Unit 11 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 11 write data area Starting address of Unit 11 write variable type area Unit 12 communications type Starting address of Unit 12 read data area Starting address of Unit 12 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 12 write data area Starting address of Unit 12 write variable type area Unit 13 communications type Starting address of Unit 13 read data area Starting address of Unit 13 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 13 write data area Starting address of Unit 13 write variable type area Unit 14 communications type Starting address
288. rting the CompoWay F protocol and temperature controllers and Digital Panel Meters supporting the SYSWAY protocol Either RS 422 or RS 485 connections 1 This input is shared by the high speed counter and synchronized pulse con trol functions 2 This output is shared by the pulse output and synchronized pulse control functions These functions can be used with transistor outputs only System Configurations Section 1 2 1 2 System Configurations 1 2 1 CPU Units CPU Units with 10 I O Points CPU Unit with Relay Outputs via Terminal Block CPU Unit with Connector CPU Unit 10 points I O terminal block 6 inputs 4 outputs 6 inputs 24 VDC Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Outputs 4 relay outputs CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector CPM2C 10CDR D CPM2C 10C1DR D y o Fujitsu connector compatible connector 6 inputs 24 VDC 4 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 10CDTC D CPM2C 10C1DTC D 4 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 10CDT1C D CPM2C 10C1DT1C D MIL 6 inputs 24 VDC connector 4 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 10CDTM D CPM2C 10C1DTM D 4 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 10CDT1M D CPM2C 10C1DT1M D Note The function of the SW2 is different from that described in this manual for all Units marked with an asterisk in the above table with lot numbers of 31800 A
289. s 67 Unit Components Section 2 2 1 2 3 1 Temperature Input Terminals Connect to a thermocouple or a platinum resistance thermometer 2 DIP Switch Sets the temperature unit C or F and the number of decimal places used z dens Ie perature unit for temperature input 0 B OFF C ON F N S ww Number of decimal places used OFF Normal 0 or 1 ON 2 3 Rotary Switch Sets the temperature range 2 5001 Range C Range F 200 to 1 300 300 to 2 300 0 0 to 500 0 0 0 to 900 0 100 to 850 100 to 1 500 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 750 0 Setting not possible CPM2C TS101 Set value Platinum Range C Range F resistance thermometer Pt100 200 0 to 650 0 300 0 to 1 200 0 JPt100 200 0 to 650 0 300 0 to 1 200 0 ses Setting not possible 4 Expansion Connector Input Connects the Temperature Sensor Unit to the CPU Unit or the previous Ex pansion Unit or Expansion Unit 5 Expansion Connector Output Connects the Temperature Sensor Unit to the next Expansion Unit or Ex pansion Unit if necessary Up to 5 Expansion Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a CPU Unit Only 10 words however can be allocated for input and output A cover for the expansion connector is not included with the Expansion Unit Use the cover included with the CPU Unit to cover
290. s CPM2C 24EDTM 200 g max CPM2C 24EDT1M 200 g max 32 points CPM2C 32EDTM 200 g max CPM2C 32EDT1M 200 g max 8 input points CPM2C 8EDM 150 g max 16 input points CPM2C 16EDM 150 g max 8 output points CPM2C 8ETM 150 g max CPM2C 8ET1M 150 g max 16 output points CPM2C 16ETM 150 g max 2 16 150 0 Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 250 g max Expansion Analog Unit CPM2C MAD11 200 g max VO Units Temperature Sensor Unit 2 5001 200 g max CPM2C TS101 200 g max CompoBus S Link Unit CPM2C SRT21 150 g max Simple Communications Unit CPM2C CIF21 150 g max Peripheral RS 232C Adapter Unit 2 1 1 150 g max Rs 422 RS 232C Adapter Unit CPM2C CIF11 150 g max 273 DM Settings Assignment Sheets Control Data Area Contents Simple Communications Unit control Simple Communications Unit status Syntax error DM address Communications control for Units 0 to 7 Communications control for Units 8 to 15 Communications control for Units 16 to 23 Communications control for Units 24 to 31 Unit 0 communications type Starting address of Unit 0 read data area Starting address of Unit 0 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 0 write data area Starting address of
291. s or Expansion Units may operate unex pectedly 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SET and then the RESET Key A confirmation message will ap pear 00000 RELE SET RESE Note If you mistakenly press the wrong key press CLR and start again from the beginning 3 Press the NOT Key to clear the force set reset status of bits in all data areas 00000FORCE RELE END NOT 4 4 26 Hex ASCII Display Change This operation is used to convert word data displays back and forth between 4 digit hexadecimal data and ASCII It is possible in any mode The displayed PV of the timer or counter cannot be changed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Monitor the status of the desired word s according to the procedure de scribed in 4 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor While the multiple addresses are being monitored the leftmost word is subject to change D0000D0001 Multiple address monitor 41423931 2 Press the TR Key to switch to ASCII display The display will toggle between hexadecimal and ASCII displays each time the TR Key is pressed D0000D0001 ed AB 3031 m D0000D0001 4142 3031 Note 1 A message contained in three words can be displayed by using ASCII dis play in combination with the Three word monitor operation 2 The Hexadecimal BCD Data Modification Operation can be used while dis playing ASCII data Input values in 4 digit hexa
292. s sinking 16 outputs connector 16 transistor CPM2C 32CDT1C D outputs sourcing MIL 16 inputs 24 16 transistor CPM2C 32CDTM D connector VDC outputs sinking 16 transistor CPM2C 32CDT1M D outputs sourcing 1 2 2 Power Supply Unit AC Power Supply Unit 1 2 3 CPU Unit Expansion Units and Expansion Units A series of up to 5 Expansion Units or Expansion Units can be connected to the expansion connector on the CPU Unit There five types of Units available Expansion Units an Analog I O Unit Temperature Sensor Units a CompoBus S Link Unit and a Simple Commu nications Unit CPU Unit Expansion I O Unit Expansion Connector output side no cover Expansion I O Connector Expansion I O Connector with cover input side System Configurations Section 1 2 A PC with 192 I O points the maximum can be assembled by connecting five Expansion I O Units to a CPU Unit with 32 points CPM2C 32CDTC D 16 inputs 16 outputs CPM2C 32EDTC 16 inputs 16 outputs x 5 Units 96 inputs 96 outputs Note Be sure that the power supply requirements of the CPU Unit Expansion Units and Expansion Units do not exceed the available capacity Only three Ex pansion Units or Expansion Units can be connected when the NT ALOO1 Adapter is connected to the communications port as a RS 232C port Expansion I O Units Units with Relay Outputs
293. s hour 120 VAC resistive load 300 bs Life x 104 200 120 VAC 0 4 E 240 VAC 0 4 gt lt 24 VDC 240 VAC resistive load Switching rate 1 800 times hour 0 1 02 03 0507 1 2 3 5 Contact current A 41 Specifications Section 2 1 Transistor Outputs Sinking or Sourcing Item Specification Max switching capacity See note CPU Units with 10 or 20 I O Points OUT01000 to OUTO1007 40 mA 4 5 VDC to 300 mA 20 4 VDC 300 mA 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC CPU Units with 32 I O Points OUT01000 to OUTO1007 40 mA 4 5 VDC to 300 mA 20 4 VDC 300 mA 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC OUT01100 to OUT01107 40 mA 4 5 VDC to 100 mA 20 4 VDC 100 mA 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC Expansion I O Units OUTO1L100 to OUTO1L107 40 4 5 VDC to 300 mA 20 4 VDC 300 mA 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC OUT01 108 to OUTO1 115 40 mA 4 5 VDC to 100 mA 20 4 VDC 100 mA 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC When using 9 01000 or OUT01001 as a pulse output connect a dummy resistor as required to bring the load current between 10 and 150 mA If the load current is below 10 mA the ON OFF response time will be longer and high speed pulses will not be output The transistor will heat if used at 150 mA or higher possibly damaging elements Min switching capacity 0 5mA Max inrush current 0 9 A for 10 ms charging and discharging waveform Leakage current 0 1 mA max Residual voltage
294. s very quickly Interrupt input interrupt input mode W353 when an input goes ON For example operating a cutter when an interrupt input is received from a Proximity Switch or Photoelectric Switch Count input ON pulses and execute a Interrupt input counter mode special process very quickly when the count reaches the preset value For example stopping the supply feed when a preset number of workpieces have passed through the system Execute a special process at a preset High speed counter interrupt count value generated when the count matches For example cutting material very the set value precisely at a given length Execute a special process when the count High speed counter interrupt is within a preset range generated when the count is within the For example sorting material very quickly set range when it is within a given length range Execute a special process when a timer Interval timer interrupt times out One shot mode For example stopping a conveyor at very precise time independent of the cycle time after the workpiece is detected Repeat a special process at regular Interval timer interrupt intervals Scheduled interrupt mode For example the speed of a sheet feeder can be monitored by measuring the input signal from an encoder at regular intervals and calculating the speed Perform simple positioning by outputting pulses to a motor driver that Pulse output function accepts pulse train inputs Receive
295. specified ranges and that all instructions are supported If a program contains a data area address that exceeds the range of a CPM2C data area a memory error will be generated when the program is executed and the Memory Area Specification Error Flag AR 1308 will be turned ON Monitoring Online Editing and Set Values 144 Data area Input words range IR 000 to IR 011 2 range IR 000 to IR 009 Output words IR 100 to IR 111 IR 010 to IR 019 Work words and dedicated words IR 012 to IR 099 IR 112 to IR 227 IR 020 to IR 049 IR 200 to IR 227 IR 050 to IR 199 cannot be used SR area SR 228 to SR 255 SR 228 to SR 255 HR area HR 00 to HR 99 HR 00 to HR 19 HR 20 to HR 99 cannot be used AR area AR 00 to AR 27 AR 00 to AR 23 AR 24 to AR 27 cannot be used LR area LR 00 to LR 63 LR 00 to LR 15 LR 16 to LR 63 cannot be used Timer Counter 000 to 511 TIM CNT 000 to 255 TIM CNT 256 to 511 cannot be used Read write DM 0000 to DM 6143 DM 0000 to DM 1999 DM 2022 to DM 2047 DM 2048 to DM 6143 cannot be used Read only DM 6144 to DM 6568 DM 6144 to DM 6599 Error Log DM 6569 to DM 6599 DM 2000 to DM 2021 PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 DM 6600 to DM 6655 Since the PC model is set to 1 a program that will run properly in the COM will pass the program check ev
296. ss where the NO condition will be deleted and press the Down Arrow Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes j 00205READ 3 Press the DEL Key 00205DELETE AND 00103 4 Press the Up Arrow Key to delete the specified instruction If the instruction has more operands the operands will be deleted automati cally with the instruction q 00205 DELETE END AND 00105 DEL 171 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 After completing the insertion and deletion procedures use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the program and verify that it has been changed correctly as shown in the following diagram Corrected Program Address Instruction Operands 00100 00101 00105 00104 Address P 01000 00201 00102 00208 4 4 11 Checking the Program This operation checks for programming errors and displays the program address and error when errors are found It is possible in PROGRAM mode only RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 2 Press the SRCH Key An input prompt will appear requesting the desired check level 00000PROG CHK sron CHK LBL 0 2 3 Input the desired check level 0 1 or 2 The program check will begin when the check level is input and the first error found will be displayed A 00178CIRCUIT ERR OUT 00200 Note Refer to 5 4 Programming Errors for detai
297. ssing for analog input 1 LL OFF Average processing not performed ON Average processing performed 4 Input type for analog input 0 LL OFF Voltage input ON Current input gn Input type for analog input 1 OFF Voltage input ON Current input 3 Expansion Connector Input Connects the Analog I O Unit to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit 4 Expansion Connector Output Connects the Analog I O Unit to the next Expansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit if necessary Up to 5 Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to a CPU Unit Only 10 words however can be allocated for input and output respectively A cover for the expansion I O connector is not included with the Expansion Unit Use the cover included with the CPU Unit to cover the unused expan sion I O connector on the last Expansion I O Unit or Expansion Unit in the PC 5 Locking Lever Used for securing Expansion Units 2 2 4 CPM2C TS001 TS101 Temperature Sensor Units Front View Right Side 2 001 6 Locking lever 4 Expansion connector input Cold junction compensator gt 5 Expansion connector output 2 DIP switch 3 Rotary switch 1 Temperature input terminals 6 Locking lever 4 Expansion I O connector input 2 DIP switch 2 1 n TS 3 Rotary switch 1 Temperature input terminal
298. st Expansion Unit s or Expansion Unit s expansion connector If the cover is difficult to remove use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the cover from the expansion connec tor sss Expansion I O con nector cover 2 Align the Unit and CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit so that the catches top and bottom on the connectors fit together Press the Units together to connect them 3 Lock the Units together by closing the locks top and bottom on the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit Place the cover in cluded with the CPU Unit on the last Unit s expansion connector Expansion Slide to lock connector cover Units together 83 Installing the 2 Section 3 3 3 3 2 CPM2C Installation The CPM2C can be installed on a 35 mm DIN track 10EDR DIN Track PFP 100N 1 m PFP 50N 50 cm 100 2 1 m End Plates PFP M Installation Lower the CPM2C so that the notch on the back of the PC catches the top of the DIN Track Push the PC forward until the lock snaps into place 2 Insert onto track 1 Pull down N Caution Be sure that the DIN Track is installed horizontally Installing the Track vertically will inhibit the airflow that cools the CPM2C and could cause overheating Removal Pry the lock down with a flat blade screwdriver and pivot the PC upward t
299. structions data and all function codes have been set the their default values Reset the expansion instructions AR 1314 ON Data was not maintained in an area specified for holding Clear the error check the data in the areas specified for holding and try again NO END INST FO END 01 is not written in the program Write END 01 at the end of the program BUS ERR CO An error has occurred during data transfer between the CPU Unit and an Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit Check the Unit s connecting cable UNIT OVER E1 Too many Expansion Units or Expansion Units have been connected Check the Unit configuration SYS FAIL FALS 01 to 99 FALS 07 instruction has been executed in the program Check the FALS number to is 01 to 99 or determine the conditions that caused execution correct the cause and clear the error 9F The cycle time has exceeded the Maximum Watch Cycle Time setting DM 6618 Check the cycle time and adjust the Maximum Cycle Time setting if necessary 5 2 5 Communications Errors The COMM indicator will be turned OFF and AR 0812 will be turned ON if an error occurs in communications through the peripheral port or AR 0804 will be turned ON if an error occurs in communications through the RS 232C port Check the connecting cables and restart There are no error messages or error codes generated by this error and the ERR ALM indicator is not affected
300. supplies 5 VDC and an external power supply is not necessary 2 The B500 AL004 requires an external AC power supply 110 VAC or 220 VAC 3 Be sure that the power supply requirements of the CPU Unit Expansion Units and Expansion Units do not exceed the available capacity Only three Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units can be connected when the NT ALO001 Adapter connected to the RS 232C port 137 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 11 No Protocol Communications The TXD 48 and RXD 47 instructions can be used in no protocol mode to ex change data with standard serial devices For example data can be received from a bar code reader or transmitted to a serial printer The serial devices can be connected to the communications port as a RS 232C port or peripheral port as shown in the following diagrams CPM2C CPU Unit RS 232C devices Bar code reader Serial printer Other serial device 2 2 Note See One to one Computer Connections on page 134 for details on the system configurations that can be assembled for serial communications 138 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 3 4 12 OMRON PT Connections In a 1 1 NT Link CPM2C can be connected directly to a Programmable Termi nal The direct connection with a Programmable Terminal is possible by using the communications as a RS 232C port only not as a peripheral port A Programmable Termi
301. switch to MONITOR mode MONITOR lt MONITOR gt BZ 7 2 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 00000 CLR 3 Force set the start input bit IR 00000 from the Programming Console to start the program 757 00000 J LD 00000 00000 00000 The cursor the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set is in progress The bit will remain ON as long as the Set Key is held down 4 The output indicator for output IR 01000 will flash ten times if the program is operating correctly The indicator should go OFF after ten one second flashes There is a mistake in the program if the output indicator doesn t flash In this case check the program and force set reset bits to check operation SET 190 SECTION 5 Test Runs and Error Processing This section describes procedures for test runs of CPM2C operation self diagnosis functions and error processing to identify and correct the hardware and software errors that can occur during PC operation 5 1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure 192 5 1 1 Initial System Checks 192 5 1 2 Flash Memory Precautions 192 5 1 3 CPM2C Test Run Procedure 192 5 2 Self diagnostic Functions 2 193
302. t 2 0000 to 9999 Specifies the starting DM address in the CPU Unit s DM area BCD containing the data that you want to write to the component Variable Types Offset 3 5 23 and 25 Use the following equation to calculate the offset for a given variable number Offset 1 2 x variable number Range Function to OOCF Sets the type of variable data that you want to write Hex The variable types are predetermined in each component so refer to the component s manual to find the actual variable type A syntax error will occur if the variable type specified in this word is not between 00 0 and OOCF Hex 241 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Variable Addresses Offset 4 6 24 and 26 Use the following equation to calculate the offset for a given variable number Offset 2 2 x variable number 0000 to FFFF Sets the variable address of the data that you want to write Hex The variable addresses are predetermined in each component so refer to the component s manual to find the actual variable address Read Data Area The starting address of the read data area is specified in the read variable type 26 words max area This read data area stores the variable data read from the component Offset Contents Response monitor Component status Variable 1 read data lower bytes Variable 1 read data upper bytes Variable 2 read data lower bytes
303. t s DM area Data Area DM address containing the data to be written to the component SYSWAY protocol A syntax error will occur if the starting address specified in this word is not BCD Starting Address of Write 0000 to 9999 BCD Specifies the starting DM address of the words that show which Variable Type Area DM address component variables will be written The data that will be written to the component is determined by the variable type and address written in the variable type area CompoWay F protocol A syntax error will occur if the starting address specified in this word is not BCD 7 4 2 Individual Unit Areas The individual Unit areas are used to monitor and set connected components individually The structure of the individual area is different for CompoWay F SYSWAY 239 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Area Structure for CompoWay F Communications Read Variable Type Area When CompoWay F has been specified as the component communications 27 words max protocol this read variable type area contains the variable type and variable address settings for the SVs and PVs that will be read Contents Number of read items Reserved Starting address of read data area Variable 1 type Variable 1 address Variable 2 type Variable 11 type Variable 11 address Variable 12 type Variable 12 address Number of Read Items Offset 0 Range Fu
304. t signed binary data If a communications error occurs while writing data the remaining write data will not be written The error code will be written to the response monitor area and the Write Command Bit will be reset to 0 The following example shows the results of the write operation when a commu nications error occurred while writing the target temperature in command group 2 Response Monitor Area Contains the error code Target temperature The SV won t be written Operation Command The operation command won t be written The decimal point position has to be managed by the user since the Tempera ture Controller s decimal point position is not transferred in SYSWAY X format communications Operation Command Offset 2 Store the operation command code 0000 to 0005 in this word When a com mand group that includes the operation command is selected the correspond ing operation command will be sent to the Temperature Controller Command code Operation Don t perform operation command No operation Stop auto tuning Start auto tuning Select backup mode Select RAM write mode Hold the Run Adjust SV 1 SVs cannot be written in a cycle in which start auto tuning has been speci fied 2 Starting and stopping auto tuning is possible for and E5AF models only 3 When selecting the RAM write mode or backup mode program the selec tion operation so that it
305. t to strong electromagnetic fields Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity Locations close to power supplies The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the lon gevity and reliability of the system Improper operating environments can lead to malfunction failure and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system Application Precautions NWARNING N Caution Observe the following precautions when using the PC System Always heed these precautions Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury e Always connect to a ground such that the grounding resistance does not ex ceed 100 when installing the Units Not connecting to the correct ground may result in electric shock Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the fol lowing Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock Assembling the Units Connecting or disconnecting the Expansion Units or Expansion Units e Connecting or wiring the cables e Connecting or disconnecting the connectors Setting DIP switches e Replacing the battery Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the PC or the system or
306. ta area Starting address of Unit 25 write variable type area Unit 26 communications type Starting address of Unit 26 read data area Starting address of Unit 26 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 26 write data area Starting address of Unit 26 write variable type area Unit 27 communications type Starting address of Unit 27 read data area Starting address of Unit 27 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 27 write data area Starting address of Unit 27 write variable type area Unit 28 communications type Starting address of Unit 28 read data area Starting address of Unit 28 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 28 write data area Starting address of Unit 28 write variable type area Unit 29 communications type Starting address of Unit 29 read data area Starting address of Unit 29 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 29 write data area Starting address of Unit 29 write variable type area Unit 30 communications type Starting address of Unit 30 read data area Starting address of Unit 30 read variable type area Starting address of Unit 30 write data area Starting address of Unit 30 write variable type area Unit 31 communications type Starting address of Unit 31 read data area Starting address of Unit 31 read variable type area 276 Starting address of Unit 31 write data area Starting address of Unit 31 w
307. table Reading range comparison results Check AR 1100 to AR 1107 or execute PRV 62 Check AR 1100 to AR 1107 Reading status Check AR 1108 comparison in progress check AR 1109 high speed counter PV overflow underflow or execute PRV 62 Pulse synchroniz ation Supported Not supported Pulse output control Trapezoidal acceleration deceleration Supported with ACC The initial frequency can be set Not supported PWM output Supported Not supported Number of simultaneous pulse outputs 2 max 1 max Maximum frequency 10 kHz max 2 kHz max Minimum frequency 10 Hz 20 Hz Pulse output quantity 16 777 215 to 16 777 215 0 to 16 777 215 Direction control Supported Not supported Positioning to absolute positions Supported Not supported Bit status while pulses are being output No effect Turned ON OFF by pulse output Reading PV Read SR 228 through SR 231 or execute PRV 62 Not supported Resetting PV Supported Not supported Status outputs Accelerating decelerating PV overflow underflow Pulse quantity set Pulse output completed Pulse output status Pulse output status 23 Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A Analog controls None 2 Section 1 5 Clock function Internal or none Internal Words containing time info AR
308. te If an erroneous input is made press the CLR Key to restore the status prior to the input Then enter the correct input 16 Restore the hexadecimal display 00203 ADB DATA B SHIFT TR 00203 ADB DATA C Bn 0 Writing Word Address DM 0000 17 Input the final operand and then press the WRITE Key It isn t necessary to input leading zeroes 00203 ADB DATA C DM 0000 00204READ WRITE NOP 000 4 4 8 Instruction Search This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified instruction in the pro gram and is possible in any mode MONTOR PROGRAM The ON OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode 1 2 3 1 Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display 169 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 2 Input the address from which the search will begin and press the Down Arrow Key It is not necessary to input leading zeroes B A A fi 00100READ 3 Input the instruction to be found and press the SRCH Key In this case the search is for OUT 01000 In this case the next OUT 01000 instruction is at address 200 as shown below our EROR 00200SRCH en Jes Joe Jo Je our 4 Press the Down Arrow Key to display the instruction s operands or press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the instruction 5 The sea
309. te by CompoWay F communications 3 With CompoWay F communications for some Digital Panel Meters unlike Temperature Controllers and Timers present values and set values are stored in BCD format These values are stored in binary format with Tem perature Controllers 221 Introduction Section 7 1 4 There are some SYSWAY commands that are not supported by OMRON components Refer to the User s Manual for the component and confirm the contents of CPM2C CIF21 command groups before using SYSWAY com munications 5 SYSWAY communications must be set to indicate whether Temperature Controllers or Digital Panel Meters are connected Refer to page 238 for the setting method 7 1 3 Processing Component Data Data Processing Basics Reading and writing are performed cyclically when the Read and Write Com mand Bits are ON CPM2C CPU Unit r DM area Control data area Write data area Read data area CPM2C CIF21 Component Simple Communications Unit Write Write Read Read Settings area Interface between the Simple Communications Unit and the CPU Unit Interface between the Simple Communications Unit and the Components Differences between SYSWAY and CompoWay F 222 The Simple Communications Unit interfaces with the CPU Unit through the CPU Unit s DM area using the CPU Unit s peripheral port The Simple Communications U
310. te precautions are taken to ensure safety 2 The setting of SW2 will affect the startup operating mode for all Units with lot numbers of 31800 August 2000 or earlier Refer to 1 7 Changes in SW2 for details Operating Modes The operating mode of the CPM2C when the power is turned ON depends upon the PC Setup settings and the Programming Console s mode switch setting if a 148 SYSMAC CPT Support Software Section 4 1 1 2 3 Programming Console is connected See 1 3 3 Operating Mode at Startup for details The CMP2C has three operating modes PROGRAM MONITOR and RUN When the CPT is offline the CPM2C will operate in PROGRAM mode When the CPT is online the CPM2C operating mode can be controlled from the CPT PROGRAM Mode The CPM2C program isn t executed in PROGRAM mode Use PROGRAM mode to create and edit the program clear memory or check the program for errors MONITOR Mode The CPM2C program is executed in MONITOR mode and I O is processed just as it is in RUN mode Use MONITOR mode to test system operations such as monitoring CPM2C operating status force setting and resetting bits chang ing the SV PV of timers and counters changing word data and online editing RUN Mode This is the CPM2C s normal operating mode The CPM2C s operating status can be monitored from a Programming Device but bits can t be force set force reset and the SV PV of timers and counters ca
311. terminals A9 and B9 are connected internally o Input devices 101 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Units with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector 102 CPU Units with 10 I O Points CPM2C 10C IDT M D Inputs IR 000 devices 00000 4 24 VDC CPU Units with 20 I O Points CPM2C 20C IDT M D Inputs IR 000 Input devices Input devices 00000 0008 Note COM terminals 3 and 4 are connected internally CPU Units with 32 I O Points CPM2C 32CI IDT M D Inputs IR 000 IR 001 Input devices Input devices 00000 00 o Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 Note COM terminals 3 and 4 are connected internally Expansion I O Units with 24 I O Points 2 24 Inputs IR word Input devices 00 Input devices m 08 00L 101 00 Note COM terminals 3 and 4 are connected internally Expansion I O Units with 32 I O Points CPM2C 32EDT Inputs IR word m Input devices 270 08 nput devices o N
312. th Digital Panel Meters For details refer to the manual for the model used 243 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Write Data Area The starting address of the write data area is specified in the write variable 26 words max type area Store the variable data that you want to write to the component in this write data area Offset Contents Response monitor Operation Command Variable 1 write data lower bytes Variable 1 write data upper bytes Variable 2 write data lower bytes Variable 2 write data upper bytes Variable 11 write data lower bytes Variable 11 write data upper bytes Variable 12 write data lower bytes Variable 12 write data upper bytes Response Monitor Area Offset 0 This area contains the results of communications when communicating with the component to write variables 1 2 3 1 End Code 00 When the function s end code is 00 the response monitor area contains the response code Response code Meaning Indicates normal completion Unsupported command Command length too long Command length too short Area type error Starting address out of range error End address out of range error Number of elements doesn t match amount of data Response length too long Parameter error Read only error Operating error 2 End Code 00 When an error occurs and the functi
313. the last Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit in the PC 7 Locking Lever Used for securing Expansion Units 57 Unit Components Section 2 2 Terminal and Connector Pin Allocation Expansion I O Units with Relay Outputs via Terminal Block Units with 10 I O Points Units with 20 I O Points CPM2C 10EDR CPM2C 20EDR a a dm Eig ee Inputs IR word m Outputs IR word n Inputs IR word m Outputs IR word n COM OUT 00 COM 13 1 OUTOO 4 IN 05 6 COM IN 11 12 2 OUT 01 Shared common IN 04 OUT 01 IN 10 11 3 COM IN 03 COM 09 10 4 OUT 02 4 IN 02 OUT 02 08 9 5 OUT 03 Shared common IN 01 OUT Shared common INO7 8 6 00 06 7 7 OUT 04 INOS 6 8 OUTO5 Shared common Units with 8 Output Points 04 5 9 COM CPM2C 8ER IN 03 4 10 OUT 06 NES 11 OUT 07 Shared common IN 01 2 12 COM IN 00 1 13 COM OUT 04 wg Shared common OUT 05 COM 1 OUT 06 OUT 07 Shared common COM 58 Unit Components Section 2 2 Expansion I O Units with Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Connector Units with 24 I O Points CPM2C 24EDTLIC Inputs IR word m Outputs IR word n NC COM IN 15
314. the unused expan sion connector on the last Expansion Unit or Expansion Unit in the PC 6 Locking Lever Used for securing Expansion Units 68 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 2 5 CPM2C SRT21 5 5 I O Link Unit Front View Right Side 6 Locking lever 3 LED indicators 4 Expansion I O connector input 5 Expansion connector output 2 DIP switch 1 CompoBus S terminals ees 6 Locking lever 1 2 3 1 CompoBus S Terminals Include the CompoBus S communications data high low terminal and NC terminals Power is supplied to the Unit internally 2 DIP Switch The DIP switch sets the Unit s node address sets the communications mode and determines whether or not the outputs will be cleared in the event of a communications error Pin s Function 1 to 4 These pins set the Unit s node address using the DIP switch pins as labeled binary digits 1 ON 0 0000 1 0001 2 0010 3 0011 4 0100 5 0101 6 0110 7 0111 8 1000 9 1001 10 1010 11 1011 12 1100 13 1101 14 1110 15 1111 ON Long distance Communications Mode OFF High speed Communications Mode See note ON Retain inputs when a communications error occurs OFF Clear inputs when a communications error occurs SdON Note The Long distance Communications Mode can be used only when connected to one of the fo
315. ting Cable G79 LJC G79 O C Sinking outputs only 01101 01 103 VU Power supply 01105 D 1 08 pe Power Power EO Power supply 01 109 7 VU supply DE 12 supply 01 11 D Power supply Power supply 01 D De Sourcing outputs only 01 05 01 07 D Power supply Power supply 01 108 D 01 10 Power supply Power supply 01 12 oC 01 09 01_11 D Power supply Power supply 01 SD L 129 Wiring Connections Relay Terminals G70A ZOC16 3 sinking outputs Section 3 4 Connecting Cables G79 C G79 O C and G2R 1 S N 1 1 ane ES O contacts 34 44 e 104 124 4 154 4 contacts 12 6 9 9
316. ting Communications with the Components 250 7 6 Precautions for Component Communications 251 7 01 OBrroriBroCessitBE aes e up x e 252 7 7 1 Fatal Errors ERR Indicator Lit 252 7 7 2 Non fatal Errors ERR Indicator Flashing 253 7 8 Refresh Intervals Reference Data 253 7 9 Example Application 0 254 7 9 1 System Configuration 254 7 9 2 System Preparation Ag p ee 255 7 9 3 DM Settings and Component Communications 256 7 9 4 Ladder Program for DM Settings 260 219 Introduction Section 7 1 7 1 Introduction 7 1 1 Features Easily Transfer Data between the PC and OMRON Components Ladder programming is not required to transfer data between the PC CPU Unit and supported OMRON components because the Simple Communications Unit exchanges data between the PC s DM area and the OMRON components Connect a Wide Variety of Components Connects OMRON components equipped with CompoWay F and host link com munications functions including Temperature Controllers Electronic Timer Counters and Digital Panel Meters Monitor All of the Components fro
317. ting has no effect on commu nications with the Programming Console Set the mode switch to PROGRAM mode Turn ON the PC Enter the password See 4 3 5 Entering the Password for details Clear All Clear the PC s memory See 4 4 2 Clearing Memory for details Read and clear all errors and messages See 4 4 3 Heading Clearing Error Messages for details 8 Start programming gt 4 3 5 Entering the Password 160 To gain access to the PC s programming functions you must first enter the pass word The password prevents unauthorized access to the program The PC prompts you for a password when PC power is turned on or if PC power is already on after the Programming Console has been connected to the PC To Using Programming Console Section 4 3 gain access to the system when the Password message appears press CLR and then MONTR Then press CLR to clear the display If the Programming Console is connected to the PC when PC power is already on the first display below will indicate the mode the PC was in before the Pro gramming Console was connected Ensure that the PC is in PROGRAM mode before you enter the password When the password is entered the PC will shift to the mode set on the mode switch causing PC operation to begin if the mode is set to RUN or MONITOR The mode can be changed to RUN or MON ITOR with the mode switch after entering the password lt PROGRAM gt PASSW
318. tion is used to change the decimal value of a word being tored as signed decimal data within a range of 32 768 to 32 767 con tents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadeci mal two s complement format Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 N Caution Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed RUN MONITOR PROGRAM Before changing the contents of I O memory be sure that the changes will not cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously In particular take care when changing the status of output bits The PC continues to refresh bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor signed decimal the status of the word for which the present value is to be changed D0200 Signed decimal monitor 00016 2 Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification PRES VAL D0200 00016 3 Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV The operation will end and the signed decimal monitoring display will return when the WRITE Key is pressed PV be set within a range of 32 768 and 32 767 Use the SET Key to input a positive number and use the RESET Key to input a negative number D WRITE 0200 ey Y c Y e 5 If an erroneous input has been made press the CLR Key to restore the sta tus prior to th
319. to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W356 E1 3 L Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Revised content June 1999 Original production January 2000 Major revisions throughout the manual Information altered on the Analog I O Unit Temperature Sensor Units the CompoBus S Link Unit Expansion Units Adapter Units the AC Power Supply Unit the Expansion Memory Unit Relay Terminals Terminal Blocks and Programming Console connections November 2000 A new section 7 was added for the CPM2C CIF21 Simple Communications Unit New models of CPU Units and Expansion Units added Changes to DIP switch pin 2 function described Specific corrections are as follows Page xiv Emergency stop circuits replaced with a different precaution Page xv The life of relays largely Be sure that terminal blocks and Use round crimp terminals for revised Page xviii Addition to top of page Page 2 Illustration changed Pages 2 3 6 7 8 20 21 30 to 32 34 35 37 and 38 Information added on Units with 20 or 32 I O points Pages 4 7 8 10 19 20 54 and 94 to 100 Simple Communications Unit added Page 7 to 9 40 43 to 45 47 to 50 73 to 78 82 to 89 179 to 182 and 185 to 189 Revised or expanded Page 12 20 24 28 41 114 and 120 Information on S
320. toring The ON OFF status of the selected word s 16 bits will be shown along the bottom of the display A 1 indicates a bit is on and a 0 indicates it is off c010 MONTR 0000000000000000 Bit 15 Bit 00 The status of force set bits is indicated by S and the status of a force reset bits is indicated by R as shown below 010 MONTR 00050000000 0000 Force set bit Force reset bit Note a The status of displayed bits can be changed at this point Refer to 4 4 21 Binary Data Modification for details 175 Programming Console Operations Section 4 4 b The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the previous or next word s bits 3 Press the CLR Key to end binary monitoring and return to the normal moni toring display 010 0000 4 4 15 Three Word Monitor 1 2 3 Note This operation is used to monitor the status of three consecutive words It is possible in any mode RUN MONITOR PROGRAM 1 Monitor the status of the first of the three words according to the procedure described in 4 4 12 Bit Digit Word Monitor If 2 or more words are being monitored the desired first word should be left most on the display c200 Word monitor EAD 2 Press the EXT Key to begin 3 monitoring The status of the selected word and the next two words will be displayed as shown below In this case DM 0000 was selected
321. tput bits The PC continues to refresh bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode so devices connected to output points on the CPU Unit Expansion Units or Expansion Units may operate unex pectedly 1 Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described 4 4 14 Binary Monitor 010 MONTR Binary monitor 1000010101010101 Bit 15 Bit 00 2 Press the CHG Key to begin binary data modification 010 CHG 000010101010101 A flashing cursor will appear over bit 15 The cursor indicates which bit can be changed 3 Three sets of keys are used to move the cursor and change bit status a Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the left and right Dn 010 CHG 1000810101010101 b Use the 1 and 0 Keys to change a bit s status to or off The cursor will move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed B 010 CHG 1010018101010101 Use the SHIFT SET SHIFT RESET Keys to force set or force re set a bit s status The cursor will move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed The NOT Key will clear force set or force reset status CHG Note Bits in the DM Area cannot be force set or force reset 4 Press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory and return to the binary monitor c010 MONTR WRITE 1010010101010101 4 4 22 Signed Decimal Data Modification This opera
322. ts with 32 I O Points CPM2C 32CDTI C D Inputs IR 000 IRO01 24 VDC Input devices Input devices Note COM terminals A9 and B9 are connected internally 99 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 100 Expansion I O Units with 24 I O Points CPM2C 24EDT Inputs IR word m B A 12 12 11 11 24 VDC 10 0 COM 9 9 COM Input devices Input devices Note COM terminals 9 and 9 are connected internally Expansion I O Units with 32 I O Points CPM2C 32EDT Inputs IR word m Note COM terminals 9 and B9 are connected internally Wiring Connections Section 3 4 Expansion I O Unit with 8 Input Points CPM2C 8EDC Inputs IR word m B A a2 i2 gt jm 00 07 24 VDC rat a 00 00 06 05 00 04 00 00 00 00 hm A jn iD jo Expansion I O Unit with 16 Input Points CPM2C 16EDC 03 02 01 00 ol sl ol Input devices Inputs IR word m Input devices Note COM
323. tup Eliminate effects from chattering and external noise 20 Set a longer input time constant in the PC Setup Comparison with the CPM1A and CPM2A Maintenance Functions Record data with time stamp Section Function Clock calendar function Establish user defined errors for desired input conditions Fatal and non fatal errors can be defined FAL 06 defines non fatal errors PC operation continues FALS 07 defines fatal errors PC operation stops Read the number of power interruptions The number of power interruptions is stored in AR 23 Set the startup operating mode Set the startup operating mode in the PC Setup Communications Functions Read write memory data and change the operating mode from a host computer DM 6600 Function Host Link communications Set the communications mode to Host Link in the PC Setup Connect to a serial device such as a bar code reader or serial printer No protocol communications Set the communications mode to no protocol in the PC Setup Make a high speed connection with an OMRON Programmable Terminal 1 1 NT Link Set the communications mode to 1 1 NT Link in the PC Setup Make a PC PC data link connection with another 2 or a CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A SRM1 CQM1 C200HS or C200HX HG HE PC 1 1 PC Link Set the communications mode to 1 1 PC Link in the PC Setup Connect a Programming C
324. u gust 2000 or earlier Refer to 1 7 Changes in SW for details CPU Units with 20 I O Points CPU Unit with Relay Outputs via Terminal Block CPU Unit with Connector CPU Unit Inputs 20 I O points I O terminal block 12 inputs 12 inputs 24 VDC Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Outputs 8 relay outputs CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector CPM2C 20CDR D CPM2C 20C1DR D 8 outputs 12 inputs 24 VDC y o Fujitsu connector compatible connector 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 20CDTC D CPM2C 20C1DTC D 8 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 20CDT1C D CPM2C 20C1DT1C D MIL 12 inputs connector 24 VDC 8 transistor outputs sinking CPM2C 20CDTM D CPM2C 20C1DTM D 8 transistor outputs sourcing CPM2C 20CDT1M D CPM2C 20C1DT1M D Note The function of the SW2 is different from that described in this manual for all Units marked with an asterisk in the above table with lot numbers of 31800 Au gust 2000 or earlier Refer to 1 7 Changes in SW for details System Configurations Section 1 2 CPU Units with 32 I O Points CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs via MIL Connector CPU Unit with Transistor Outputs via Fujitsu compatible Connector CPU Unit Inputs Outputs 32 points I O Fujitsu 16 inputs 24 16 transistor CPM2C 32CDTC D 16 inputs connector compatible VDC output
325. uctions 0 64 us LD instruction 7 8 ws MOV instruction Program capacity 4 096 words Max VO CPU Unit only 10 points 20 points 32 points capacity With Expansion 170 points max 180 points max 192 points max I O Units and Expansion Units Input bits IR 00000 to IR 00915 Words not used for input bits can be used for work bits Output bits IR 01000 to IR 01915 Words not used for output bits can be used for work bits Work bits 928 bits IR 02000 to IR 04915 and IR 20000 to IR 22715 Special bits SR area 448 bits SR 22800 to SR 25515 Temporary bits TR area 8 bits TRO to TR7 Holding bits HR area 320 bits HR 0000 to HR 1915 Words HR 00 to HR 19 Auxiliary bits AR area 384 bits AR 0000 to AR 2315 Words AR 00 to AR 23 Link bits LR area 256 bits LR 0000 to LR 1515 Words LR 00 to LR 15 Timers Counters 256 timers counters TIM CNT 000 to TIM CNT 255 1 ms timers TMHH 10 ms timers TIMH 15 100 ms timers TIM 1 s 10 s timers TIML Decrementing counters CNT Reversible counters CNTR 12 Data memory Read Write 2 048 words DM 0000 to DM 2047 Read only 456 words DM 6144 to DM 6599 PC Setup 56 words DM 6600 to DM 6655 Error Log is contained in DM 2000 to DM 2021 Interrupt processing 2 interrupts 4 interrupts 4 interrupts Shared by the external interrupt inputs counter mode and the quick
326. unications Section 7 5 EEPROM when this selection is made and if it is made each scan the service live of the EEPROM will be affected 7 5 DM Settings and Component Communications 7 5 1 DM Settings 1 2 3 This section explains the basic procedures required to communicate with con nected components Refer to 7 4 Data Memory DM Allocation for details on DM settings and setting procedures Write the following program sections in the user program to establish commu nications with the connected components Verify that the components that you want to connect are supported by the CPM2C CIF21 Determine whether the components will communicate by SYS WAY or CompoWay F communications Write the following program sections at the beginning of the user program so that the DM settings are made when the CPM2C is turned ON 1 Parameter Settings in the Control Data Area e Set the number of connected components 32 e When using SYSWAY set each component s segment information e When using SYSWAY select and set a command group that contains the values that you want to read or write Set the communications protocol e When using SYSWAY set the starting addresses of each component s read write areas e When using CompoWay F set the starting addresses of each compo nent s read write variable type areas 2 When using CompoWay F set the variable type and variable address of each variable that you want to read or write
327. ure fluctuation 0 05 C max Startup time 300 ms max at input voltage of 100 VAC or 200 VAC and the rated output Output hold time 10 ms at input voltage of 100 VAC or 200 VAC and the rated output Overcurrent protection Self resetting operates at 10596 to 350 of the rated current suspended and independent operation Overvoltage protection None Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient storage temperature 20 to 75 C Ambient operating humidity 10 to 90 no condensation Dielectric strength 2 000 V for 1 min between all inputs and GR Leakage current 10 mA 3 000 V for 1 min between all inputs and all outputs Leakage current 10 mA 1 000 V for 1 min between all outputs and GR Leakage current 10 mA Insulation resistance 100 MQ min at 500 VDC between all outputs and any input and between all outputs and GR Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz amplitude 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m s in X Y and Z directions for 80 minutes according Time coefficient 8 minutes x coefficient factor 10 total time 80 min Shock resistance 147 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Noise terminal voltage FCC class A 44 Unit Components Section 2 2 2 2 Unit Components 2 2 1 CPU Unit Components CPU Unit Component Names CPU Unit with Relay Out puts via Terminal Block Front View 7 Communicatio
328. utput 24 VDC 600 mA CPM2C PA201 Communications Port Connecting Cables Connector 2 111 Connecting Cable Description Converts the CPM2C CPU Unit s communications port to a peripheral port and RS 232C port Cable length 0 15 m about 4 CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable Converts the CPM2C CPU Unit s communications port to a peripheral port 0 05 m about 2 CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable Converts the CPM2C CPU Unit s communications port to an RS 232C port 0 1 m about 2 263 Standard Models Peripheral Devices Programming Console Appearance Model Number CQM1H PROO1 E Appendix A Specifications 2 m Connecting Cable attached Connects directly to the CPM2C CQM1 PRO01 E 2 m Connecting Cable attached CS1W CN114 or CPM2C CN111 also required C200H PRO27 E Hand held w backlight requires one of the Connecting Cables listed below C200H CN222 C200H CN422 Connects the C200H PRO27 E toa 2 m cable peripheral port 4 m cable CS1W CN224 CS1W CN624 Connects the C200H PRO27 E 2 m cable directly to the CPM2C CPU Unit s communications port 6 m cable CX Programmer WS02 CXPC1 E For MS Windows 95 98 CD ROM SYSMAC CPT WS01 CPTB1 E For IBM PC AT or compatible computers 3 5 disks 2HD and CD ROM SYSMAC Support Software Backup Battery
329. uts Can be set for all input points 1 ms 2 ms 3 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms or 80 ms 20 I O points relay transistor outputs 32 I O points transistor outputs Clock function Shows the year month day of the week day hour minute and second Battery backup The CPU Units with C1 in the model number have a built in clock Not provided on CPU Units with 32 I O points Communications functions A CPM2C CN111 CS1W CN114 or CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable is required to connect to the CPM2C s communications port The communications port can be used as both a peripheral and RS 232C port Peripheral port Supports Host Link peripheral bus no protocol or Programming Console connections RS 232C port Supports Host Link no protocol 1 1 Slave Unit Link 1 1 Master Unit Link or 1 1 NT Link connections Functions provided by Expansion Units Analog I O Unit Provides 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output Temperature Sensor Unit Provides up to 8 thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer inputs CompoBus S I O Link Unit Provides 8 inputs and 8 outputs as CompoBus S Slave Memory protection See notes 1 and 2 HR area AR area program contents read write DM area contents and counter values maintained during power interruptions Memory backup See notes 1 and 2 Flash memory Program read only DM area and PC Setup Memory backup The read write DM area HR area
330. y 2 kHz CPM2C Encoder Input 00003 to 00006 PC Setup Settings The input bits shown in the following tables can operate as normal inputs or they can be assigned special functions in the PC Setup Special functions for input bits IR 00000 through IR 00002 are set in DM 6642 Bit PC Setup setting DM 6642 bits 08 to15 address 00 01 02 03 or 04 IR 00000 Used as normal Used as high speed Used as inputs for inputs counter inputs synchronized pulse IR 00001 00002 Used as a normal input 108 Wiring Connections Section 3 4 Note Special functions for input bits IR 00003 through IR 00006 are set in DM 6628 Bits in PC Setup setting in DM 6628 address DM 6628 1 00003 001003 Used as normal Used as interrupt Used as IR 00004 04 to 07 inputs inputs including quick response counter mode inputs IR 00005 08 to 11 IR 00006 12 to 15 These inputs must be set as normal inputs setting 0 when a CPU Unit with 10 I O points is being used High speed Counter Input Connection Examples Differential Phase Mode Count frequency 5 kHz E6B2 CWZ6C Encoder NPN open col lector output Leakage Current 00000 A phase input Encoder we 00002 Z phase input 00002 Reset input 00001 B phase input Pulse Plus Direction Input mode Count frequency 20 kHz CPM2C CPM2C E6A2 CS5
331. y F communications Simple Communications Unit Control Offset 0 Setting Function 0 to 3 RUN Stop If this digit is set to 1 after the power is turned ON the Simple Digit 16 Communications Unit will start communications with components and the CPU Unit If a fatal error has occurred the Unit will not start communications with components even if this digit is set to 1 The Simple Communications Unit will not communicate with components if this digit is set to O 4 to 7 Communications 0 to 9 Sets the response monitoring time for access from the Simple Digit 161 timeout BCD Communications to connected components The timeout time is set in multiples of 500 ms Set value 1 x 500 ms This setting is usually set to 0 which sets a response monitoring time of 500 ms 81015 Number of 00 to 32 Specifies the number of components connected to the Simple Digits 162 connected BCD Communications Unit The Simple Communications Unit will not and 163 components communicate with components if the number of connected components is set to 0 235 Data Memory DM Allocation Section 7 4 Simple Communications Unit Status Offset 1 Error Setting Function condition Error occurred 0 to 7 Error code The rightmost 2 digits contain an error code Bit 15 ON Digits 16 01 Watchdog timer error fatal error and 161 When this error occurs the Simple Communications Unit will stop all communications
332. y connector included to pro vide a 24 VDC power supply Power supply connector included with the Unit 1 2 3 1 Align the power supply connector with the socket on the bottom of the 2 and insert the connector Red lead 24 VDC Black lead 0 VDC 2 To remove the power supply connector grasp the power supply connector not the wires release the lock tab on the connector and remove the con nector Note 1 The CPM2C PA201 is the recommended Power Supply Unit When using other power supplies be sure to use a DC power supply with sufficient capacity and low ripple 86 Wiring and Connections Section 3 4 2 Do not perform a voltage withstand test on the DC power supply terminals on the CPU Unit The test might damage the PC s internal components 3 When the equipment must conform to the EC Directives Low voltage Direc tives use a power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation 3 4 3 Using the AC Power Supply Unit Wiring Terminal Blocks Use round crimp terminals for wiring AC power supply input to the AC Power Supply Unit CPM2C PA201 Use crimp terminals or solid wires for wiring to the ground terminal and the service power supply terminals Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Use M3 5 terminal screws Tighten the terminal screws securely to a torque of 0 74 to 0 9 Nem Use round terminals of the dimensions shown Round Terminal 6 2 mm max Ox

CPM2C OPERATION MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents